Quarterlytics / Technology / Information Technology Services / Redcentric plc

Redcentric plc

rcn · LSE Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker rcn
Exchange LSE
Sector Technology
Industry Information Technology Services
Employees 201-500
← All annual reports
FY2024 Annual Report · Redcentric plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Year ended 31 March 2024 | Redcentric plc
Company Number 08397584
2024
REPORT & ACCOUNTS

STRATEGIC REPORT
Highlights
5
Chairman’s Statement
6
Chief Executive Officer’s Review
9
Financial Review
13
Alternative Performance Measures
22
Strategy and Business Model
27
Section 172 Statement
28
Risk Management
32
Corporate Responsibility
34
Sustainability Reporting
38
GOVERNANCE
Introduction to Governance
52
Corporate Governance
53
Board of Directors
59
Audit Committee Report
62
Directors’ Remuneration Report
65
Directors’ Report
71
Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 
75
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of Redcentric plc
76
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
82
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position
83
Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
84
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity
85
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
87
Company Balance Sheet
133
Company Statement of Changes in Equity
134
Notes to the Company Financial Statements
135
Directors and Advisers
143
Contents
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
2
Enabling transformation 
through managed IT services 
Redcentric is a trusted transformation partner – 
supporting you with your cloud, communications, 
network and cyber security needs. 
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
3

Financial highlights
Total revenue 
£163.2m
+15.2%
Adjusted  
operating profit 
£9.7m
+11.8%
Adjusted  
EBITDA
£28.3m
+15.6%
Recurring revenue 
£149.1m
+16.1%
Recurring revenue 
percentage
91.4%
Net debt
£72.4m 
-0.9% 
Adjusted 
basic earnings 
per share
1.99p 
-25.1%
Highlights
Financial performance measures
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
(“FY24”) 
Year ended 
 31 March 2023 
(“FY23”)
Change
Total revenue
£163.2m
£141.7m 
15.2%
Recurring revenue 1
£149.1m
£128.5m 
16.1%
Recurring revenue percentage1
91.4%
90.7%
0.7%
Adjusted EBITDA1
£28.3m
£24.5m 
15.6%
Adjusted operating profit1
£9.7m
£8.6m 
11.8%
Reported operating profit/(loss)
£0.9m 
(£8.9m)
109.5%
Reported loss before tax
(£4.7m)
(£12.5m)
62.7%
Adjusted cash generated from operations1
£27.4m
£23.1m 
18.7%
Reported cash generated from operations
£23.2m 
£14.8m 
56.2%
Net debt1
(£72.4m)
(£73.0m)
0.9%
Adjusted net debt1
(£42.0m)
(£35.6m)
(18.0%)
Adjusted basic earnings per share1
1.99p
2.66p 
(25.1%)
Reported basic loss per share
(2.20p)
(5.94p) 
63.1%
Percentage change calculated on absolute values.
1This annual report and accounts contains certain financial measures that are not defined or recognised under IFRS but are presented to provide readers 
with additional financial information that is evaluated by management and investors in assessing the performance of the Group. 
This additional information presented is not uniformly defined by all companies and may not be comparable with similarly titled measures and disclosures 
from other companies. These measures are unaudited and should not be viewed in isolation or as an alternative to those measures that are derived in 
accordance with IFRS.
For an explanation of the alternative performance measures used in this report and reconciliations to their most directly related GAAP measure, 
please refer to pages 22-25.
4
5
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Chairman’s Statement
I am very pleased to introduce the annual report and accounts (“Report”) for the Redcentric plc 
(“Redcentric” or “Company”) group of companies (the “Group”) for the financial year ended  
31 March 2024 (“FY24”). 
Overview and financial results
With all the original integration programmes materially 
completed in FY24, the business has a solid foundation  
on which to flourish. Following the acquisitions made in 
FY22 and FY23 we are now seeing strong organic growth 
across all our core service towers of Cloud, Connectivity  
and Communication.
The agile culture within the business has enabled us 
to move swiftly and take advantage of the Broadcom 
acquisition of VMware, gaining several new customers along 
with considerable market share gains. It is also pleasing to 
note that several cross-sell opportunities are already being 
discussed providing further penetration into our broad 
range of products and services. 
I am delighted to see that the data centre assets acquired 
with Sungard are starting to be recognised by a new larger 
customer base as a secure home for their mission critical 
infrastructure. Our West Yorkshire facility (previously 
referred to as Elland) and London West facility (previously 
referred to as London Technology Centre) offer the space, 
power and security that is in short supply, particularly in 
London. We are very optimistic about the future of these 
data centres particularly given demand is being driven by 
Artificial Intelligence (“AI”) processing needs that require 
high-density, power-hungry equipment, both of which our 
primary data centres can cater for.
Electricity costs have featured regularly in the company 
updates since the acquisitions completed in FY23. The 
management team have worked tirelessly to implement 
efficiency measures that help to reduce our electricity 
consumption, with the dual purpose of reducing cost 
and carbon emissions. These measures have delivered 
impressive volume savings of c.40% in the London West 
and Woking data centres. This combined with reduced 
electricity prices locked in from 1 April 2024 means that 
electricity costs are expected to reduce by c.£8m in FY25.
The focus for FY25 will be to continue to drive organic 
growth whilst leveraging the fixed cost base, driving further 
productivity and efficiency gains. Whilst organic growth 
is the priority, the company continually assesses M&A 
opportunities in the market, and with £40m of its £80m 
committed bank facility drawn at the date of this report the 
company has significant firepower should an exceptional 
opportunity present itself.
Final dividend
During the year, the board of Directors of the Company 
(the “Board”) declared an interim dividend of 1.2 pence 
per share (FY23: 1.2 pence per share), with £1.9m paid on 
18 April 2024 (FY23: £1.9m). 
A final dividend of 2.4p per share is recommended by the 
Board and will result in a total dividend for FY24 of 3.6p 
per share (financial year ended 31 March 2023 “FY23”: 
3.6p per share). Subject to approval by shareholders at 
the Company’s annual general meeting (“AGM”), this is 
expected to be paid on 24 January 2025 to shareholders 
on the register at the close of business on 13 December 
2024 with shares going ex-dividend on 12 December 2024. 
The last day for Dividend Reinvestment Plan elections is 
2 January 2025.
Board changes and people
On 24 July 2023, Helena Feltham, Non-Executive Director, 
stepped down from the Board. On behalf of the Board 
and all at Redcentric I would like to thank Helena for her 
significant contribution over the last two years and wish 
her all the very best for the future.
On 1 December 2023, Oliver Scott was appointed as a Non-
Executive Director (non-independent). Oliver is a partner of 
Kestrel Partners LLP (“Kestrel”), the independent investment 
manager, which Oliver co-founded in 2009. Kestrel is 
Redcentric’s largest shareholder. Oliver brings with him 
considerable market knowledge alongside a breadth and 
depth of skills and experience. 
On 13 February 2024, Michelle Senecal De Fonseca was 
appointed as a Non-Executive Director and Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee. Michelle is an experienced executive 
and Non-Executive Director in the technology industry.
On 15 August 2024, Peter Brotherton, Chief Executive 
Officer, notified the Board of his intention to retire and  
step down from the Board. Peter will remain in post until  
a suitable replacement is recruited. Peter joined the group 
in November 2016 as Chief Financial Officer before taking 
on the role of Chief Executive Officer in November 2018. 
Peter initially navigated the business through a challenging 
period and more latterly has played a key part in Redcentric’s 
growth strategy. On behalf of the Board and all at Redcentric 
I would like to thank Peter for his very significant contribution 
over the last eight years and wish him all the very best in  
his retirement.
Outlook 
The business has entered FY25 with a significantly enhanced 
scale, strong organic revenue growth, significantly reduced 
electricity costs and some very exciting sales prospects. 
Management are now focussed on delivering profitable 
growth to drive improved margins and cash generation, 
whilst ensuring service levels are maintained to limit 
customer cancellation and price erosion risks. 
The factors above all lead to the Board remaining optimistic 
for the future of the business.
Nick Bate 
Chairman 
15 August 2024
7
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report
6

Strategic execution
FY24 has been marked by significant progress and growth 
as we continued to focus on the three operational themes 
outlined in the interim results: organic revenue growth, 
integration of the acquired businesses and electricity 
conservation measures. 
The financial results reflect the benefits of the first full year 
of trading contribution from the 4D Data Centres and two 
Sungard trade and asset acquisitions made in FY23. They 
also reflect the slightly delayed implementation of the new 
cooling infrastructure at the London West data centre and 
the closure costs of the Harrogate data centre.
Organic growth 
The sales team continue to exploit the opportunities  
arising from the acquisitions made over the previous two 
financial years, with the enlarged customer base presenting 
new cross-sell opportunities and the new product offerings 
providing a wider range of services to the existing  
customer base.
On a consistent basis recurring revenues, excluding  
revenue from Sungard short term contract cancellations  
and Harrogate customer cancellations, which we deem 
unrelated to normal trading and are discussed further 
below, grew by 9.0% over the prior ten-month period  
(Aug-22 to May-23 vs Jun-23 to Mar-24 with Aug-22 being 
the first comparable month following the acquisitions) with 
net new business gains seen across all service towers. 
Revenues from cancelled Sungard short term contracts 
amounted to £1.0m in the 12 months ended 31 March 
2024 (12 months to 31 March 2023: £6.2m). Whilst it is 
disappointing that we did not retain these customers 
following our acquisition, cancelled short term customer 
contracts were excluded from the calculation of the final 
consideration payable, and any remaining Sungard short 
term contracts have now been converted into longer  
term contracts.
The closure and decommissioning of the Harrogate data 
centre was completed at the end of March 2024 in line 
with our project plan and expectations. Whilst most of the 
customers were successfully migrated to our West Yorkshire 
data centre, four of the larger customers unexpectedly 
decided to cancel their contracts. The annualised revenue 
and EBITDA from these customers totalled £2.6m and 
£1.3m respectively. Final annual savings from the closure of 
the Harrogate data centre were £1.4m, in line with previous 
expectations and comprise lease cash cost savings of £1.0m 
and operating costs savings of £0.4m, with these savings 
effective from FY25. Although most of the cost savings have 
been offset by cancelled customer contracts, the closure 
of the data centre will reduce future maintenance capital 
expenditure and technical debt.
VMware / Market trends
As the marketplace continually evolves Redcentric is eager 
to be at the forefront of any significant changes. The recent 
acquisition of VMware by Broadcom continues to present 
a substantial opportunity. Redcentric was selected as one 
of seven UK Pinnacle partners of VMware, following which 
we actively mobilised to acquire a wide base of new end 
user clients and historical VM partners. These activities have 
proven very successful with a gain of 30 new customers 
(of which 29 are service providers) from Q1 FY25. This 
represents a material market share gain and importantly 
represents significant future cross-sell opportunities.
The successful onboarding of the service providers has 
provided a well-formed new route to market for our 
wide-ranging portfolio. Proactive engagement with these 
new partners is in its initial stages, but is already showing 
positive outcomes with an initial 10 active opportunities 
under discussion across our portfolio including MS 
licensing, Storage as a Service, Infrastructure as a Service 
(IaaS), Co-Location and Contact Centre solutions.
The continued emergence of AI is generating considerable 
demand for high density data centre space and available 
electricity. Our London West and West Yorkshire facilities 
have the required infrastructure, space, and available 
electricity to make us ideally positioned to meet these 
requirements. 
Our London West data centre is an Enterprise grade facility 
that is built to a capacity of 18MW and has 14MW reserved 
on the national grid. Given the scarcity of available power 
in London in “Tier 3” equivalent data centres, London West 
has become an attractive alternative to the larger scale data 
centre providers, and we have recently seen a significant 
increase in interest from Enterprise customers requiring high 
density infrastructure. 
Our West Yorkshire data centre is situated between Leeds 
and Manchester and is ideally placed to serve the “Northern 
Powerhouse”, with 11MW of power available. There is ample 
power capacity and physical space to provide high density 
infrastructure. 
Chief Executive’s Review
8
9
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
SD-WAN and Zero Trust 
Network Access has been 
a game-changer for us. 
Network performance is 
better and network security 
has been enhanced.
“
”
8

Our organic growth strategy can be summarised into 
five key focus areas: 
1.	
Cross-sell multiple products into the recently acquired 
customer bases:
•	
The majority of the recently acquired customers 
take one product only.
2.	
Cross-sell of new products into the historic Redcentric 
customer base:
•	
Hyper-cloud, cyber security and business  
recovery products have all been added by the  
recent acquisitions.
3.	
Cross-sell into the new VMware customer wins:
•	
A significant cross-sell opportunity has been 
created by the new customer wins.
4.	
Attracting new logos:
•	
Maximise the exposure opportunities generated 
by the new VMware strategic partnership; and
•	
Leverage the increased scale and improved 
perception to attract new customers.
5.	
Leveraging the newly acquired Sungard DCs to attract 
largescale AI and Enterprise customer deployments:
•	
Our London West and West Yorkshire facilities 
are ideally placed to meet demand for AI.
Integration of the acquired businesses 
The integration work undertaken in FY24 has concentrated 
on three main areas: closure of the Harrogate data centre, 
supplier rationalisation and consolidation of cloud platforms.
Closure of the Harrogate data centre 
The closure of the Harrogate data centre was completed at  
the end of March 2024, with the fully decommissioned building 
being handed back to the landlord on the lease end date of  
24 March 2024. 
Supplier rationalisation 
During the year, the supplier base was rationalised with 
two large Managed Services contracts insourced and more 
favourable terms on a third contract achieved by moving 
supplier. This has resulted in combined net annual savings of 
£1.1m, being supplier savings of £1.7m offset by additional 
staff costs of £0.6m. 
Consolidation of cloud platforms 
As a result of the acquisitions, we have acquired numerous 
cloud and backup platforms which replicate existing 
Redcentric platforms. During the year a number of these 
platforms were either consolidated or decommissioned 
resulting in annualised savings of c.£0.5m. Now that 
resource has been freed up from the Harrogate relocation 
project, which has seen significant resource and cost drain 
in FY24, we expect to launch further and more extensive 
consolidation programmes which will result in further 
annualised savings of at least £0.6m.
As mentioned above, the acquisition of VMware by 
Broadcom has created significant sales opportunities, 
however, a material increase in the cost of licenses has also 
presented a short-term cost challenge to the business. 
The increase in the VMware cost base came at a time for 
Redcentric when a programme of platform rationalisation 
was in full swing. With this programme progressing well 
our VMware license requirements have been dramatically 
reduced. This, combined with a large portion of the 
increased costs being passed on to customers, has 
positioned Redcentric well to effectively manage the  
impact of Broadcom licensing changes.
Electricity sourcing & consumption
London West data centre 
An investment of £2.2m has been made for new cooling 
infrastructure, significantly upgrading the plant at the 
recently acquired site. 
Whilst all the planned electricity conservation measures 
were completed by the year end, the installation of the 
cooling infrastructure at the London West site was delayed 
by four-and-a-half-months due to the requirement of the 
cooling system water to be decontaminated prior to the 
installation of the new plant. The plant was eventually 
installed in November 2023 and was fully commissioned 
by the end of January 2024. 
The new system is performing well with non-productive 
power savings of c.40% to date, slightly higher than our 
original expectations.
Based on the current volume savings and the forward 
electricity prices secured, we expect to achieve annualised 
volume savings of c.£1.5m, resulting in an impressive 
payback of eighteen months and considerable savings over 
the course of the assets expected fifteen-year life.
Chief Executive’s Review (continued)
Woking data centre 
This is a third-party data centre where we rent a large data 
hall rather than actively managing the site ourselves. Our 
partners at this site have also recently completed a major 
chiller replacement programme with their new plant being 
live from 1 September 2023. 
This is currently yielding non-productive power savings of 
c.40%, in line with our expectations. Based on the current 
savings being realised and the anticipated electricity prices, 
we expect to achieve annualised savings of c.£1.1m from  
this site. 
The electricity conservation measures are expected to 
generate year on year volume savings of £2.8m. This, 
combined with significantly reduced electricity commodity 
prices from 1 April 2024, is expected to reduce electricity 
charges by £8.1m and will result in FY25 fully reflecting the 
benefit of the acquisitions made during FY22 and FY23.
Our electricity contracts have recently been renegotiated 
which now expire at the end of September 2028. This 
enables us to forward buy power to September 2028 
reducing our exposure to commodity price volatility and 
providing our customers with a more certain cost base.
Financial results
We are pleased to announce the following results for FY24:
•	
Revenues of £163.2m (FY23: £141.7m);
•	
Adjusted EBITDA* of £28.3m (FY23: £24.5m);
•	
Adjusted operating profit^ of £9.7m (FY23: £8.6m);
•	
Reported operating profit of £0.9m (FY23: loss of 
£8.9m);
•	
Reported loss before tax of £4.7m (FY23: £12.5m);
•	
Net debt as at 31 March 2024 of £72.4m (31 March 
2023: net debt of £73.0m); and
•	
Adjusted net debt as at 31 March 2024 of £42.0m 
(31 March 2023: adjusted net debt of £35.6m);
*Adjusted EBITDA is EBITDA excluding exceptional items, share-based 
payments and associated National Insurance. Exceptional items are 
outlined in Note 9.
^Adjusted operating profit is reported operating profit excluding 
amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations, 
exceptional items and share-based payments. 
The net debt position is after dividend payments of £1.4m, 
the payments of contingent consideration of £0.9m for 
the acquisitions of Sungard DC’s (£0.4m) and 7 Elements 
(£0.5m), exceptional items largely relating to integration and 
restructuring costs of £4.0m, working capital inflow of £0.1m 
and capital expenditure of £10.7m.
Outlook 
FY24 was a very productive year with all the original 
integration programmes materially completed, generating 
cost savings either in line or slightly ahead of our 
expectations, albeit with the energy conservation measures 
implemented later than anticipated. The business is seeing 
strong organic revenue growth and is seizing the potential 
opportunities provided by both the Broadcom acquisition 
of VMware and the emergence of high-density AI demand. 
The Enterprise grade data centre facilities that were part 
of the Sungard DC acquisition are proving to be a key 
differentiator and are attracting significant interest from 
Enterprise clients. 
The electricity conservation measures, combined with a 
significant proportion of secured lower electricity prices 
from 1 April 2024, means that electricity costs (elevated over 
the past two financial years as a result of geopolitical events) 
are expected to reduce by £8.1m in FY25. 
With both the synergy and energy efficiency programmes 
completing during FY24, FY25 will be the first full year that 
reflects the full benefit of the acquisitions.
The focus for FY25 will be to continue driving organic 
recurring revenue and EBITDA growth of at least 5% and 
7.5% respectively, whilst leveraging operational gearing to 
deliver improved margins and cashflow performance.
Peter Brotherton  
Chief Executive Officer  
15 August 2024
Chief Executive’s Review (continued)
11
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report
10

Financial Review
Financial performance measures
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
(“FY24”) 
Year ended 
 31 March 2023 
(“FY23”)
Change
Total revenue
£163.2m
£141.7m 
15.2%
Recurring revenue 1
£149.1m
£128.5m 
16.1%
Recurring revenue percentage1
91.4%
90.7%
0.7%
Adjusted EBITDA1
£28.3m 
£24.5m 
15.6%
Adjusted operating profit1
£9.7m
£8.6m 
11.8%
Reported operating profit/(loss)
£0.9m
(£8.9m) 
109.5% 
Reported loss before tax
(£4.7m) 
(£12.5m) 
62.7% 
Adjusted cash generated from operations1
£27.4m
£23.1m 
18.7%
Reported cash generated from operations
£23.2m
£14.8m 
56.2%
Net debt1
(£72.4m)
(£73.0m)
0.9%
Adjusted net debt1
(£42.0m)
(£35.6m)
(18.0%)
Adjusted basic earnings per share1
1.99p 
2.66p 
(25.1%)
Reported basic loss per share
(2.20p) 
(5.94p) 
63.1%
Percentage changes calculated on absolute values. 
1 For an explanation of the alternative performance measures used in this report, please refer to pages 22-25. 
Overview
The results for FY24 represent the first full year of trading of the 4D Data Centres and the two Sungard acquisitions, with 
FY23 containing approximately 9 months trading from both acquisitions. The impact of this, coupled with organic growth, 
resulted in improvements in total revenue, recurring revenue, adjusted EBITDA and adjusted operating profit. Reported 
operating profit has been significantly impacted by the costs of exiting the Harrogate data centre and migrating customers 
to other sites, primarily our West Yorkshire data centre. Despite this, reported operating profit has improved by £10.0m 
reflecting significant exceptional costs in the prior year related to the acquisition and integration activity, coupled with the 
release of £2.1m of contingent consideration in FY24 in relation to the Sungard acquisition following final settlement with  
the administrators.
Whilst still recording a reported loss after tax for the year of £3.5m in FY24, this has significantly reduced on FY23 by £5.8m 
representing the improved trading performance of the Group at adjusted EBITDA coupled with the materially reduced 
exceptional costs following the increased acquisition-related spending in FY23. Net debt has remained broadly stable at 
£72.4m (FY23: £73.0m), with adjusted net debt at £42.0m (FY23: £35.6m), reflecting the capex investment in FY24 to deliver 
future energy efficiency gains, coupled with the exceptional costs associated with exiting the Harrogate data centre. 
12
13
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
The telephony platform 
and analytics has given us 
a better understanding of 
what’s happening, allowing 
us to make decisions which 
drive efficiencies and improve 
outcomes for patients.
“
”
12

Key considerations in the Financial Statements, but relating principally to the prior year, include:
1.	
On 26 April 2022, the Group completed a refinance of its debt facilities that were due to mature on 30 June 2022. 
The new debt facilities consist of an £80m Revolving Credit Facility (“RCF”), £7m Asset Financing Facility and a £20m 
uncommitted accordion facility and are provided by a new four bank group consisting of NatWest, Barclays, Bank of 
Ireland, and Silicon Valley Bank (now under the HSBC group) (the “New Facility”), with the Asset Financing Facility 
provided by Lombard. The New Facility had an initial maturity date of 26 April 2025 with options to extend by a further 
one or two years. The borrowing cost of the RCF is determined by the level of the Company leverage. An arrangement 
fee of 75 basis points was payable upfront, in addition to a commitment fee on the undrawn portion of the new RCF,  
on equivalent terms to the previous facility. The New Facility provides the Group with additional liquidity to be  
used for working capital purposes and to fund acquisitions. On 26 March 2024 these debt facilities were extended  
at the Group’s request, with a new maturity date of 26 April 2026. As part of this extension of the RCF and Asset 
Financing Facility term, there were no material changes to the financial debt covenants or to other terms and  
conditions of the agreements.
2.	
The acquisition on 7 June 2022 by the Group’s trading subsidiary Redcentric Solutions Limited of the consulting 
business from Sungard Availability Services (UK) Limited (in administration) for £4.2m consideration paid in cash.  
The business provides services in respect of business continuity, cloud and infrastructure, cyber resilience, disaster 
recovery and hybrid cloud transformation services alongside the provision and operation of cloud related services.  
This acquisition is considered to be a linked transaction with the DC acquisition as mentioned in point 4 below. 
3.	
The acquisition on 27 June 2022 by Redcentric Solutions Limited for 100% of the share capital of 4D Data Centres 
Limited (“4D”) for £10.1m consideration paid in cash. The business provides colocation, cloud and connectivity services 
to mid-market customers. The primary purpose of the business combination is to scale the Group’s existing revenues in 
this area with significant synergies expected as the acquisition is integrated into the Group. On 28 February 2023, the 
trade, assets and liabilities of 4D were hived into Redcentric Solutions Limited. 
4.	
The acquisition on 6 July 2022 by Redcentric Solutions Limited of certain business and assets relating to three data 
centres “DCs” from Sungard Availability Services (UK) Limited (in administration) for initial consideration of £10.1m 
paid in cash and a cash prepayment of £3.4m, with contingent consideration at a maximum potential value of £19.0m 
depending on customer retention and certain performance criteria in the 12-month period post-acquisition. During 
FY24 the contingent consideration was finalised and £0.4m was paid.
The key financial highlights are as follows:
•	
Total revenue growth of 15.2% to £163.2m (FY23: £141.7m).
•	
Recurring revenue grew by 16.1% to £149.1m, with recurring revenue representing 91.4% of the total revenue (FY23: 
£128.5m/90.7%).
•	
Gross profit has increased by 17.0% to £118.0m.
•	
Adjusted EBITDA of £28.3m is 15.6% ahead of FY23.
•	
Adjusted operating profit increased by £1.1m to £9.7m (11.8% increase).
•	
Adjusted net debt as at 31 March 2024 was £42.0m, excluding £30.3m of IFRS16 lease liabilities that were previously 
classified as operating leases under IAS17. 
•	
Reported operating profit increased by £9.8m to £0.9m.
•	
Reported loss before tax has reduced by £7.8m to £4.7m (FY23: £12.5m).
Financial Review (continued)
Financial Review (continued)
Revenue
Revenue for FY24 was generated wholly from the UK and is analysed as follows:
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
 31 March 2023 
£000
Change 
£000
Change 
%
Recurring revenue 1
149,091
128,461
20,630
16.1%
Product revenue
5,507
7,144
(1,637)
(22.9%)
Services revenue
8,552
6,069
2,483
40.9%
Total revenue
163,150 
141,674 
21,476
15.2%
1 For an explanation of the alternative performance measures used in this report, please refer to pages 22-25.
Total revenue increased by £21.5m compared to FY23, impacted by the first full year of revenue generated from FY23 
acquisitions of 4D Data Centres and Sungard (FY23 had approximately 9 months of trading of both acquisitions). 
Revenue is analysed into the following categories:
•	
Recurring revenue has increased 16.1% to £149.1m (FY23: £128.5m) reflecting a full year of revenue generated from 
FY23 acquisitions of Sungard and 4D Data Centres (FY23 had approximately 9 months of trading of both acquisitions), 
coupled with organic revenue growth.
•	
Non-recurring product revenue has decreased £1.6m to £5.5m (FY23: £7.1m), with sales activity focused on higher 
margin services revenue (see below).
•	
Non-recurring services revenue increased to £8.6m (FY23: £6.1m), reflecting a shift in focus from lower margin  
product revenue.
Gross profit
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
 31 March 2023 
£000
Change 
£000
Change 
%
Gross Profit
118,035 
 100,911 
17,124
17.0%
Gross Margin
72.3%
71.2%
N/A
N/A
Gross profit increased by 17.0% (£17.1m) reflecting the Group’s increased revenue and contribution from the full year of 
trading from 4D Data Centres and Sungard Consulting acquisitions. Gross Margin % has increased partly due to higher gross 
margin recurring revenue from colocation contracts within the 4D Data Centres and Sungard acquisitions, coupled with the 
impact of a shift in non-recurring revenues away from product sales to higher margin services revenue. 
14
15
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Adjusted operating costs1
The Group’s adjusted operating costs (operating expenditure excluding depreciation, amortisation, exceptional items, 
other operating income and share-based payments) are set out in the table below:
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
 31 March 2023 
£000
Change 
£000
Change 
%
UK employee costs
39,202
34,482
4,720
13.7%
Office and data centre costs
30,702
25,335
5,367
21.2%
Network and equipment costs
14,319
11,824
2,495
21.1%
Other sales, general and administration costs
4,273
3,364
909
27.0%
Offshore costs
1,223
1,414
(191)
(13.5%)
Total adjusted operating costs
89,719
76,419
13,300
17.4%
1 For an explanation of the alternative performance measures used in this report, please refer to pages 22-25.
Total adjusted operating costs for FY24 were 17.4% (£13.3m) higher than prior year, reflecting:
•	
Employee costs increased £4.7m (13.7%) primarily due to a first full year of headcount acquired through the 4D Data 
Centres and Sungard acquisitions;
•	
Office and data centre costs increased by £5.4m (21.2%), primarily due to the impact of increased electricity costs as 
several electricity supply contract renewals fell due during the UK energy crisis, and the increase in the number of data 
centres through the 4D Data Centres and Sungard acquisitions; and
•	
Network and equipment costs increased by £2.5m (21.1%), and other sales, general and administration costs are up 
£0.9m (27.0%), both primarily due to the first full year of trading from the 4D Data Centres and Sungard acquisitions.
Employees
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
(Number) 
Year ended 
 31 March 2023 
(Number)
Variance 
(Number)
Year-end headcount
UK
562
540
22
India
97
98
(1)
Total employees
659
638
21
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
(Number) 
Year ended 
 31 March 2023 
(Number)
Variance 
(Number)
Average headcount
UK
561
491
70
India
98
97
1
Total employees
659
588
71
Financial Review (continued)
Financial Review (continued)
Adjusted EBITDA1 
Adjusted EBITDA is EBITDA excluding exceptional items (as set out in Note 9), share-based payments and associated 
National Insurance costs. The same adjustments are also made in determining the adjusted EBITDA margin.
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
 31 March 2023 
£000
Reported operating profit/(loss)
852
(8,939)
Amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations
5,229
8,183
Amortisation of other intangible assets
781
590 
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
6,089
4,636
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
11,777
10,617
EBITDA
24,728 
15,087 
Exceptional income
(2,100)
-
Exceptional costs (comprised of):
4,550
8,149
Acquisition fees
350
695
Integration costs
3,467
5,965
Restructuring costs
733
-
Costs relating to the settlement of an historical supplier dispute
-
809
Cloud computing costs
-
680
Share-based payments and associated National Insurance
1,138
1,256
Adjusted EBITDA1
28,316
24,492
1 For an explanation of the alternative performance measures used in this report, please refer to pages 22-25.
Adjusted EBITDA increased by 15.6% to £28.3m, £3.8m higher than the prior year. FY24 includes a full year of contribution 
from the Sungard and 4D Data Centres acquisitions (FY23: approximately 9 months of contribution).
Taxation, interest and dividends
The tax charge for the year was a credit of £1.2m (FY23: a credit of £3.2m), comprising an income tax charge of £0.2m (FY23: 
a charge of £0.1m), and a deferred tax credit of £1.4m (FY23: a credit of £3.3m).
Net finance costs for the year were £5.5m (FY23: £3.5m), including £1.3m (FY23: £1.2m) of interest payable on leases of 
which £1.3m (FY23: £1.2m) related to leases previously recognised as operating leases under IAS17. 
The Group paid a final dividend in respect of the year to 31 March 2023 of 2.4p per ordinary share, with a total payment 
value of £3.8m. This was made up of £1.4m cash with the remainder in dividend shares (see Note 27 for further details).
During the year, the Group paid an interim dividend for FY24 of 1.2p per share, totalling £1.9m as detailed in Note 14 (FY23: 
1.2p per share).
A final dividend payment of 2.4p per share will be paid on 24 January 2025, subject to approval at the Company’s AGM, to 
shareholders on the register at the close of business on 13 December 2024 with shares going ex-dividend on 12 December 
2024. The last day for Dividend Reinvestment Plan elections is 2 January 2025. 
16
17
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Net debt
During the year, net debt decreased from £73.0m to £72.4m as at 31 March 2024, with the movements shown in the tables below:
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
 31 March 2023 
£000
Operating profit/(loss)
852
(8,939)
Depreciation and amortisation
23,876
24,026
Exceptional costs
4,550
8,149
Exceptional income
(2,100)
-
Share based payments
1,138
1,256
Adjusted EBITDA1
28,316
 24,492
Profit on disposal of fixed assets
(53)
-
Working capital movements
114
(1,410)
Movement on provisions
(978)
-
Adjusted cash generated from operations
27,399
23,082
Cash conversion
96.8% 
94.2% 
Capital expenditure - cash purchases
(9,259)
(6,374)
Capital expenditure - finance lease purchases
(1,485)
-
Asset financing proceeds 
2,419
966
Net capital expenditure
(8,325)
(5,408)
Corporation tax paid
(174)
(670)
Interest paid
(3,615)
(1,795)
Loan arrangement fees/fee amortisation
(209)
(291)
Finance lease interest
(1,328)
(1,248)
Effect of exchange rates
(109)
(101)
Other movements in net debt
(5,435)
(4,105)
Normalised net debt movement1
13,639
13,569
Cash cost of exceptional items
(4,240)
(8,258)
Acquisition of subsidiaries (net of cash acquired)
(890)
(26,606)
IFRS 16 lease additions
(4,237)
(28,314)
IFRS 16 lease additions on acquisition 
-
(1,976)
Drawdown on Asset Financing Facility
(2,419)
-
Remeasurement relating to lease modification
-
629
Dividends paid in cash
(1,369)
(5,593)
Disposal of treasury shares on exercise of share options
116
229
(13,039)
(69,889) 
Decrease/(increase) in net debt
600
(56,320)
Net debt at the beginning of the period
(72,965)
(16,645)
Net debt at the end of the period
(72,365)
(72,965) 
1 For an explanation of the alternative performance measures used in this report, please refer to pages 22-25. Exceptional items are outlined in Note 9.
Financial Review (continued)
Financial Review (continued)
Net debt (continued)
As at 
31 March 
2022
Net cash 
flow
Net non-
cash flow
As at 
31 March 
2023
Net cash 
flow 
Net non-
cash flow
As at 
31 March 
2024
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
Cash
1,804
(335)
(103)
1,366
1,873
(109)
3,130
RCF
-
(31,537)
(2,094)
(33,631)
(2,712)
(3,542)
(39,885)
Term Loan
(1,004)
533
(24)
(495)
474
-
(21)
Asset Financing 
Facility
-
-
-
-
(1,517)
(2,092)
(3,609)
Lease Liabilities
(17,445)
(21,543)
(1,217)
(40,205)
7,728
497
(31,980)
(16,645) 
(52,882) 
(3,438)
(72,965) 
5,846
(5,246)
(72,365)
Included in lease liabilities at 31 March 2024 are £30.3m (FY23: £36.9m) of IFRS 16 lease liabilities that were previously 
classified as operating leases under IAS17.
Trade receivables and trade payables
In the year, focus remained on maintaining a strong ageing profile with a low level of aged debt. At the year end, 87% of 
gross trade debt was current or less than 30 days overdue (FY23: 96%). 
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
 31 March 2023 
£000
Current
14,008
18,450
1 to 30 days overdue
2,928
2,212 
31 to 60 days overdue
1,794
557
61 to 90 days overdue
383
283
91 to 180 days overdue
320
194 
> 180 days overdue
(43)
(240)
Gross trade debtors
19,390
21,456
Provisions
(1,200)
(1,251)
Net trade debtors
18,190
20,205
Trade debtor days were 36 at 31 March 2024 compared to 46 at 31 March 2023. Trade debtor days are calculated as gross 
trade debtors divided by revenue (incl. VAT) multiplied by 365.
Trade payable days were 36 at 31 March 2024 compared to 42 as at 31 March 2023. Trade payable days are calculated as 
trade payables divided by total purchases (cost of sales and operating expenditure) multiplied by 365.
18
19
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Financing
31 March 2024
31 March 2023
Available
Drawn
Undrawn
Available 
Drawn
Undrawn 
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
Committed
- Revolving credit facility
80,000
40,000
40,000
80,000
34,000
46,000
- Term Loans
21
21
-
496
496
-
- Leases
35,588
35,588
-
40,204
40,204
-
- Asset Financing Facility
7,000
3,625
3,375
7,000
2,309
4,691
122,609
79,234
43,375
127,700
77,009
50,691
Uncommitted
- Accordion Facility
20,000
-
20,000
20,000
-
20,000
20,000
-
20,000
20,000
-
20,000
Total borrowing facilities
142,609
79,234
63,375
147,700
77,009
70,691
Uncommitted facilities represent facilities available to the Group, but which can be withdrawn by the lender and hence are not within the 
Group’s control. 
As at 31 March 2024, the Group was party to £87.0m of committed banking facilities, comprising a Revolving Credit Facility 
of £80.0m (net £40.0m utilised at 31 March 2024) and a £7.0m Asset Financing Facility (£3.6m utilised at 31 March 2024).  
As at 31 March 2024, these facilities are due to expire on 25 April 2026.
The borrowing cost of the RCF is determined by the Group’s leverage and has a borrowing cost of 235 basis points over 
SONIA at the Group’s current leverage levels. A commitment fee is payable on the undrawn portion of the RCF at 94 basis 
points, being 40% of the borrowing cost. 
David Senior 
Chief Financial Officer 
15 August 2024
Financial Review (continued)
20
21
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
The Redcentric cloud team 
managed the seamless migration 
of our £100 million e-commerce 
business, providing us with 
a stable scalable platform, 
to help us to grow our business 
for many years to come.
“
”
21

Alternative Performance Measures
This Report contains certain financial measures that are not defined or recognised under IFRS but are presented to provide 
readers with additional financial information that is evaluated by management and investors in assessing the performance 
of the Group. 
This additional information presented is not uniformly defined by all companies and may not be comparable with similarly 
titled measures and disclosures by other companies. These measures are unaudited and should not be viewed in isolation 
or as an alternative to those measures that are derived in accordance with IFRS.
Recurring revenue
Recurring revenue is the revenue that annually repeats either under contractual arrangement or by predictable customer 
habit. It highlights how much of the Group’s total revenue is secured and anticipated to repeat in future periods, providing a 
measure of the financial strength of the business. It is a measure that is well understood by the Group’s investor and analyst 
community and is used for internal performance reporting.
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
 31 March 2023 
£000
Reported revenue
163,150
141,674
Non-recurring revenue
(14,059)
(13,213)
Recurring revenue
149,091
128,461
Recurring revenue percentage is the percentage of recurring revenue as a proportion of total revenue.
Recurring revenue makes up 91.4% of total revenue in FY24, an increase of 0.7ppts from prior year (FY23: 90.7%).
Maintenance capital expenditure
Maintenance capital expenditure is the capital expenditure that is incurred in support of the Group’s underlying 
infrastructure rather than in support of specific customer contracts. This metric shows the level of internal investment the 
Group is making through capital expenditure. As the measure explains and analyses routine capital expenditure, land and 
buildings (including any associated assets relating to dilapidation provisions) and asset financing additions are excluded due 
to the infrequency of this expenditure occurring. Customer capital expenditure relates to assets utilised by the Group in 
delivering Managed Services to our customers. 
Year ended 
31 March 
2024 
£000
Year ended 
 31 March 
2023 
£000
Property plant and equipment additions – excluding additions on acquisition (note 16)
9,318
5,505 
Intangible additions – excluding additions on acquisition (note 15)
1,479
869 
Right of use asset additions – lease liabilities that would have been classified as finance 
leases under IAS 17, excluding asset financing 
1,033 
391 
Reported capital expenditure incurred
11,830
6,765 
Customer capital expenditure incurred (notes 15 & 16)
(4,099)
(3,234)
Maintenance capital expenditure incurred
7,731
3,531
Maintenance capital expenditure of £7.7m has increased by £4.2m (FY23: £3.5m) driven by additions to PPE for efficiency 
measures in the data centres, primarily at London West. Customer capital expenditure has increased to £4.1m (FY23: £3.2m) 
to support revenue growth. We will continue to monitor the Group’s capital requirements and invest in the business  
when appropriate. 
Alternative Performance Measures (continued)
EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA 
Adjusted EBITDA is EBITDA excluding exceptional items (as set out in Note 9), share-based payments and associated 
National Insurance. The same adjustments are also made in determining the adjusted EBITDA margin. Items are only 
classified as exceptional due to their nature or size.
The Board considers that this metric provides a useful measure of assessing trading performance of the Group as it excludes 
items which impact financial performance such as exceptional costs and the amortisation of acquired intangibles arising 
from business combinations, which varies year on year dependent on the timing and size of any acquisitions. 
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
 31 March 2023 
£000
Reported operating profit/(loss)
852 
(8,939) 
Amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations
5,229
8,183
Amortisation of other intangible assets
781 
590 
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
6,089 
4,636 
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
11,777
10,617 
EBITDA
24,728 
 15,087 
Exceptional income
(2,100) 
-
Exceptional costs (comprised of): 
4,550
8,149 
Acquisition fees
350
695
Integration costs
3,467
5,965
Restructuring costs
733
-
Costs relating to the settlement of an historical supplier dispute
-
809
Cloud computing costs
-
680
Share-based payments and associated National Insurance
1,138
1,256 
Adjusted EBITDA
28,316
24,492 
Adjusted EBITDA increased to £28.3m, £3.8m higher than prior year, with adjusted EBITDA margin of 17.4% (up from 17.3%). 
Adjusted operating profit
Adjusted operating profit is operating profit excluding amortisation on acquired intangibles, exceptional items and 
share-based payments. The same adjustments are also made in determining the adjusted operating profit margin and in 
determining adjusted earnings per share (“EPS”). 
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
 31 March 2023 
£000
Reported operating profit/(loss)
852
(8,939) 
Amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations
5,229
8,183 
Exceptional costs
4,550
8,149 
Exceptional income
(2,100)
-
Share-based payments and associated National Insurance
1,138
1,256 
Adjusted operating profit
9,669 
8,649 
The EPS calculation further adjusts for the tax impact of the operating profit adjustments, presented in Note 13. This metric 
is used within the Group’s dividend policy and is therefore relevant for our shareholders. Share based payments are removed 
for adjusted operating profit as they are not reflective of trading.
22
23
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report
Annual Report and Accounts 2024

Alternative Performance Measures (continued)
Adjusted operating costs
Adjusted operating costs are operating costs less depreciation, amortisation, exceptional items, share-based payments and 
foreign exchange. This metric shows the day-to-day trading operating expenditure of the Group, excluding non-trading and 
non-recurring items (items of a nature that the Group does not expect to incur every financial year) which impact financial 
performance. These are controllable operating costs which provide investors with useful information about how the Group 
is managing its expenditure. 
Year ended 
31 March 
2024 
£000
Year ended 
 31 March 
2023 
£000
Reported operating expenditure
119,283
 109,938 
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
(11,777)
(10,617)
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
(6,089)
(4,636)
Amortisation of intangibles arising on business combinations
(5,229)
(8,183)
Amortisation of other intangible assets
(781)
(590)
Exceptional costs
(4,550)
(8,149)
Other operating income
-
(88)
Share-based payments and associated national insurance
(1,138)
(1,256)
Adjusted operating expenditure
89,719 
76,419 
Adjusted cash generated from operations
Adjusted cash generated from operations is reported cash generated from operations plus the cash cost of exceptional 
items. As the Group has been involved in acquisitions and has had other significant, non-repeatable cash impacting items, 
this measure allows investors to see the cash generated from operations excluding these items which are one-off by nature 
therefore will not repeat in future years. 
Year ended 
31 March 
2024 
£000
Year ended 
 31 March 
2023 
£000
Reported cash generated from operations
23,159 
 14,824 
Cash costs of exceptional items
4,240
8,258 
Adjusted cash generated from operations
27,399
23,082
Alternative Performance Measures (continued)
Adjusted net debt
Adjusted net debt is reported net debt (borrowings net of cash) less supplier loans and less lease liabilities that would have 
been classified as operating leases under IAS17 and is a measure reviewed by the Group’s banking syndicate as part of 
covenant compliance as detailed in Note 24. 
Year ended 
31 March 
2024 
£000
Year ended 
 31 March 
2023 
£000
Reported net debt
(72,365)
(72,965)
Term loans
21
495 
Lease liabilities that would have been classified as operating leases under IAS 17
30,346
36,891
Adjusted net debt
(41,998)
(35,579)
Normalised net debt movement
The normalised net debt movement, as summarised in the net debt table on page 18, details the movement in net debt 
before one-off (exceptional) amounts and is therefore a useful indicator to the potential movement in net debt in FY25.
David Senior 
Chief Financial Officer 
15 August 2024
24
25
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report

Strategy and Business Model
The market for IT Managed Services in the UK is highly fragmented and is served by a broad spectrum of businesses 
from global telecommunication companies through hardware and software providers, system integrators and a range 
of independent managed service providers of varying sizes, through to companies providing individual elements of the 
IT Managed Services spectrum. 
The Group provides a broad range of Managed Services across its three core specialist areas of Cloud, Connectivity and 
Communication, and has formed a divisional structure to ensure each area has dedicated focus with appropriately skilled 
resource. To complete our product offering, the Group acquired a cyber security business (7 Elements) in FY23 and has 
built additional cyber security capabilities into its product portfolio.
The Group positions itself in the market as being able to combine the benefits of proprietary network and data centres 
with a flexible and technically skilled workforce able to deliver and support critical services and solutions in a highly 
secure environment.
The Group seeks to differentiate itself in three distinct ways: 
•	
Innovation – innovation in the design and delivery of services; 
•	
Reliability – the right technical skills, organised in the right way, to give predictable high-quality results; and 
•	
Value – service offerings that are designed to offer value for money to mid-market customers. 
Through these differentiators, the Group aims to attract new customers and to deepen and broaden its relationships 
with existing customers. 
In addition to the organic growth strategy outlined in the Chief Executives’ summary, the Board’s strategy for 
growth comprises:
•	
identifying acquisition opportunities for increased scale; 
•	
ongoing investment in expanding and enhancing the Group’s own infrastructure so that it can provide its customers 
with the very highest levels of security and service;
•	
effective use of the Group’s scale and resources to explore and invest in new technologies so that its customers can 
benefit from the high levels of innovation across the whole industry; and
•	
organic revenue growth through cross-selling existing products to existing customers and acquiring new customers 
attracted by our comprehensive product set.
The Board believes that the Group’s position between the very large system integrators and network operators and the 
smaller competitors (that may lack delivery structure, reputation, reliability and financial strength) is a very compelling one. 
The Group has a strong and reliable set of core infrastructure and has developed a delivery model that provides assurance 
and certainty for customers.
26
Redcentric is giving us 
a hugely flexible and 
functional platform which 
we can use as a springboard 
to optimise both IT delivery 
and care provision.
“
”
26
27
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report

Section 172 Statement – Our Stakeholders
The Board recognises its duty to consider the needs and concerns of the Group’s key 
stakeholders during its discussions and decision-making. The Board has had regard to the 
importance of fostering relationships with its stakeholders as set out below and also detailed 
in the Strategic Report and Corporate Governance Report of this Report. More information on 
how the Directors have discharged their duties under section 172 of the Companies Act 2006 
is also available in the Strategic Report on pages 5 to 50 and Corporate Governance Report on 
pages 53 to 59. 
Colleagues:
•	
Colleague briefings – the Company continues to  
hold monthly colleague briefing sessions with the 
operating board of the Company (“Operating Board”) 
to enable colleagues to ask questions and raise issues, 
and for colleagues to be provided with updates on  
the business. 
•	
Performance updates – key performance information 
such as trading updates and financial results are always 
promptly communicated to colleagues by group wide 
internal emails and follow up all colleague calls. There 
are also a number of communications champions 
across the business who meet monthly to ensure the 
Company’s commitment to two-way communication 
with colleagues is met and continually enhance and 
develop its communications strategy. 
•	
Engagement survey – we completed an all-colleague 
opinion survey in FY24 to benchmark the engagement 
of our colleagues and support us in the development 
of a new action plan which will form the basis of our 
people strategy moving forwards. 
•	
Learning management – the partnership with LinkedIn 
learning which was launched in FY23 has been 
received positively by colleagues, and we have seen a 
strong uptake and utilisation of the programmes and 
materials on offer. We have also run further leadership 
development programmes for our business leaders. 
•	
Colleague support – well-being has continued to be 
a priority and we have developed and are beginning 
to implement a more strategically minded well-being 
strategy to support our colleagues.
•	
Colleague recognition – our weekly Friday Shout Out 
recognition scheme has continued, and it is pleasing 
to see the business’ new colleagues taking part in the 
opportunity to recognise their colleagues and foster a 
sense of collaborative working. 
•	
Electric car scheme – the Group has seen substantial 
uptake in the electric car scheme for colleagues 
launched in FY23 and run in conjunction with a 
third-party scheme provider, the scheme works to 
deliver savings for our colleagues whilst also positively 
impacting the environment. 
•	
Share schemes – the Company has in place a HMRC 
approved Save-As-You -Earn option plan (“SAYE”) 
to enable colleagues to become personally invested 
as shareholders of the Group. The Company invites 
participation on an annual basis.
•	
Further information is included in the Corporate 
Responsibility section of this Report on pages 34-37 
and in the Corporate Governance Report on pages  
53-59.
Customers 
•	
Customer surveys – there is an NPS survey programme 
run by the Company’s service delivery management 
team to customers directly following a service review 
– this ensures a high return rate and continuous 
feedback from our customers. The results are discussed 
in monthly service improvement meetings with all 
department heads, in order that any trends and areas 
of focus can be addressed.
•	
Monthly and quarterly service reviews – regular service 
reviews are held with customers, led by service delivery 
managers and account managers, with a focus on 
service experience and further support customers  
may require.
•	
RAG Reviews – Service delivery managers record their 
perception of the customer experience each month 
for their customers in the preceding period. This is 
captured into a RAG dashboard (Red, Amber, Green) 
which is reviewed monthly to identify and overcome 
any potential service issues. 
Section 172 Statement – Our Stakeholders (continued)
Customers (continued) 
•	
Customer Success Forum – We have recently launched 
a senior management focused Customer Success 
forum. This is an internal monthly forum designed to 
identify any potential barriers to customer success, 
and to work collaboratively on any business wide 
improvement initiatives.
•	
Daily social media updates – the Group’s social media 
presence and activity has continued to increase and 
improve during the year. At least daily updates are 
provided through the Company’s corporate social 
media channels (LinkedIn, X and Facebook) and contain 
key updates and customer case studies. These are 
shared by customer facing employees, with the sharing 
of such information now included in the KPIs for such 
employees, to ensure as wide a reach as possible to 
keep customers appraised of the Company’s news  
and offering. 
•	
Customer effort scoring – within the Group’s support 
systems, the Group reaches out to customers on  
an ongoing basis to score the support service they  
have received, with follow up actions taken by the 
support team based on each customer’s score  
and requirements.
•	
Customer service management solution – SMAX 
continues to be the primary platform for day-to-day 
interaction with customers. There have been a large 
number of enhancements to ticket automation carried 
out in FY24 to ensure tickets reach the correct team 
as quickly as possible to improve resolution times. 
There have also been several reporting enhancements 
implemented to enable better visibility of tickets  
for customers.
•	
Targeted customer marketing and communications 
– during the year, the Group’s marketing team has 
continued to enhance its customer communications 
and the way in which campaigns, product launches 
and solution migrations are communicated. Targeted 
and personalised communications are agreed between 
the Group’s marketing team and customers’ account 
and service delivery managers, to ensure that the 
right customers are informed and guided through 
any changes which may affect them. A new monthly 
newsletter has also been developed, named “Engage”, 
which is sent to all customer contacts; it shares industry 
news, operational updates, innovation stories and 
introduces relevant offers and solutions to ensure 
customers remain informed of the growing portfolio. 
There is also a focus on the teams they have access to 
as part of being a valued Redcentric customer.
Suppliers 
•	
The Board is committed to fostering and developing 
effective partnerships with the Group’s suppliers, 
based on forward planning, collaboration, and trust. 
These supplier partnerships are crucial in delivering 
many of our services and in developing them further. 
The supplier partnerships help the Group deliver value 
and quality to its customers and help its partners to 
develop and grow. 
•	
Following the appointment of a new procurement 
and supply chain Director in the year, a new vendor 
management framework has been implemented and 
rolled out across all strategic vendors to drive both 
supply chain effectiveness and efficiencies but also to 
enhance the mutual supplier value creation through 
innovation and collaboration with ‘ecosystem’ partners. 
•	
There is a particular emphasis on key strategic partners, 
each of whom participate in quarterly partner events 
on top of normal annual reviews within the Group’s 
strategic value framework, where product leads, sales 
and marketing, procurement and operations teams 
collaborate to further both revenue opportunities and 
customer value propositions.
•	
As part of the Group’s commitment to work in line 
with the ten principles of the United Nations Global 
Compact, we have issued an externally facing 
sustainable supply chain policy document and are 
building ESG measurements into our quarterly strategic 
vendor assessment criteria. 
•	
All major sourcing initiatives also now include an 
environmental impact assessment criterion acting 
alongside more traditional quality and value for money 
qualifying criteria.
•	
Supply contract consolidation has been completed 
following the acquisitions completed in prior financial 
years, and any legacy strategic suppliers have been 
identified and elevated into the Group’s strategic  
value framework to ensure the best relationships  
are maintained.
•	
The Company also continues to give additional focus 
to suppliers in the faster growing sectors of our market, 
such as Cloud Security and Managed Services, driven 
by customer requirements; this has culminated in the 
Company being recognised by VMware’s acquiring 
owner Broadcom as a Pinnacle Partner in the UK, one of 
only 7 in the UK and recognising the Company as one 
of its top 100 global partners.
28
29
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Section 172 Statement – Our Stakeholders (continued)
Suppliers (continued) 
•	
Some of the Group’s strategic partnerships are 
listed below: 
	-
Microsoft – Application Development, Application 
Integration, Cloud Platform, Cloud Productivity, 
DevOps (all GOLD); Content and Collaboration, Data 
Platform, Datacentre, Security (all SILVER);
	-
Cisco – GOLD; 
	-
HPE – Silver PRSP (Partner Ready Service Provider); 
	-
Citrix – CSPP (Citrix Solutions Provider Programme);
	-
VMware by Broadcom – Pinnacle Partner;
	-
Fortinet;
	-
British Telecom; and
	-
Virgin Media Business.
Shareholders 
•	
Analysts and investor meetings – the Chief Executive 
Officer and Chief Financial Officer hold analyst and 
investor roadshow meetings throughout the year, 
particularly following the release of the Company’s 
interim and full year results and feedback from those 
meetings is shared with the Board. A full schedule of 
roadshows took place once again in FY24.
•	
The Company’s AGM is a key opportunity for 
engagement between the Board and shareholders, 
particularly private shareholders. At its most recent 
AGM, Redcentric was pleased to once again provide 
the opportunity to hold a face-to-face meeting, but 
shareholders were also again given the opportunity to 
submit questions for the Board ahead of the AGM in 
the event they were unable to attend in person.
•	
Annual Report and Accounts – the Group’s annual report 
and accounts is made available to all shareholders both 
online and in hard copy where requested. 
•	
Group website – all presentations and announcements 
and other key shareholder information is available on 
the investor section of the Group’s website.
•	
Further information is included in the Corporate 
Governance Report on pages 53-59.
Environment 
•	
The Company has maintained its ISO 14001:2015 
environmental management accreditation, through 
which it enhances environmental performance, fulfils  
its compliance obligations, and achieves its 
environmental objectives. 
•	
The Company continues to see the benefits of the 
energy conservation measures introduced in relation 
to its data centres, with all major initiatives completed 
in the year, such as the full commissioning of cooling 
plant at our London West site. In addition, a significant 
step to reduce the Group’s data centre footprint was 
achieved in FY24 through completion of the project to 
close the Harrogate data centre and consolidate into 
the more efficient West Yorkshire site.
•	
The Group’s hybrid working policy has continued to 
positively impact environmental performance through 
reduced office space, energy usage and travel.
•	
The Group’s electric car salary sacrifice scheme, open to 
all colleagues as part of its commitment to reduce the 
Group’s carbon footprint, continues to see strong uptake.
•	
In FY24, the Group’s Sustainability Committee 
continued to regularly meet to discuss environmental, 
social and governance (“ESG”) issues, with 
representation from across the business.  The 
committee, together with assistance from third-party 
experts appointed specifically to assist with the Group’s 
ESG initiatives, has continued to further build on the 
initial work undertaken in FY22/23 and continues to 
assess the Group’s position on ESG issues and develop 
the roadmap and actions for delivering the Group’s 
ESG strategy.
•	
Redcentric has continued to engage with third-party 
specialists to support the Group in calculating Scope 3 
emissions and developing its net zero strategy. Once 
again producing a Task Force for Climate-Related 
Financial Disclosures (“TCFD”) report, which can be found 
on pages 38-50 of this Report.  The Group continues its 
commitment to the environment and in support of the 
Government’s UK-wide target to reach net zero by 2050 
and the Group is pleased to have produced the TCFD as 
part of our statutory reporting requirements. 
Further information is included in the Sustainability section 
of the Report on pages 38-50.
Our customers
We use our expertise to help our commercial customers  
to deliver great customer experience, to innovate and to 
grow profitably.
30
31
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Risk Management
The Board takes risk management very seriously and adopts 
a simple and consistent approach to the identification, 
monitoring and management of risk across our entire 
business. Risk management underpins our product 
enhancements, business growth and most importantly 
maintains stakeholder confidence.
The Group has a strong framework that is embedded 
within the business, managing risks smartly to achieve its 
ambitions safely, delivering on strategies, supporting the 
business model, protecting all assets and leading the way 
to a sustainable future are all underpinned by a strong risk 
averse culture.
How do we manage our risks? 
Risks are managed on a tiered hierarchy, with each 
division of the business owning and managing risk to their 
respective areas, measured scientifically and consistently 
throughout. High value risks are cascaded upwards to 
operating board level and then beyond that to Group level 
alongside principal corporate risk. This allows the right level 
of visibility, ownership, and management in the right places 
with complete consistency and transparency throughout. 
Alongside divisional risk, there are also function specific 
registers, tailored to the recording, understanding 
and mitigation of environmental, sustainability, quality 
management, business continuity and information / cyber 
security risk, all of which are actively owned and managed 
by internal teams.
All employees are encouraged to identify, record, monitor 
and manage risks at local level, empowered to take 
ownership whilst management oversight is maintained and 
continued, with regular and independent reviews at all levels.
Our principal risks 
Sustainability
The Environment
The Board takes into consideration both main areas of 
environmental risk, these being the direct and indirect 
impact on environmental and social areas by Group 
activities, and the second being the potential impact or 
influence on the Group and its customers by external 
environmental issues.
Regarding the Group’s impact on the environment, this 
includes the social, geographical, direct and indirect 
emissions and overall sustainability of its sites, people, 
products and processes. As customers seek to reduce their 
own emissions, demand for the Group’s propositions and 
services change, the Board recognises the importance of 
our corporate responsibilities to do everything possible to 
reduce the impact that both Redcentric and its customers 
have on the environment. 
The second environmental focus being the potential impact 
to Group functions based on external environmental factors 
and how they may be changing – including environmental 
disaster – that may impact on its ability to maintain services 
and keep customers, sites and workforce safe. This is an 
increasing risk and gains a lot of focus by the Board as the 
physical impacts of climate change and the actions taken by 
governments and society to try and limit global warming. 
The Group operates a dedicated in-house ESG committee 
and maintains an environment specific aspects and 
opportunities register to both understand and mitigate 
risks to our own continuity through external environmental 
impacts. The Group is also certified to a recognised 
environment management standard and maintains an 
annual set of environmental objectives used to measure and 
maximise power efficiency across sites, reduce business 
travel, reduce use of paper and physical peripheries, reduce 
waste and proactively offset carbon emissions through 
carbon reduction planning strategies.
The impact of environmental risks has also been considered 
when preparing the FY24 financials. When undertaking the 
going concern assessment management have factored in 
a downside scenario to reflect reduced energy efficiency 
savings in sustained periods of hot weather (see Note 1.1 
for further details). Also, in reviewing the value of intangible 
assets and property plant and equipment, consideration 
has been given to any impacts of climate-related risks to fair 
values or the useful economic lives of assets. Management 
have deemed these risks as not material for FY24. 
Business continuity
The Board believes that one of the key differentiators that 
Redcentric offers is that its services are provided over its 
own controlled and managed infrastructure, such as its own 
networks and data centres. Whilst this provides customers 
with comfort around resilience and reliability, the Group 
is also exposed to a variety of risks to business continuity 
through infrastructure failure, loss of physical site, logical 
access failures and impact to its people. 
A critical element of the Group’s operating methodologies 
and procedures is to mitigate such risks through the 
careful construction, maintenance and management of 
all elements of Business continuity, adhering to industry 
standard methodology. Operating regular externally audited 
exercises, the Group maintains continuity plans across all 
areas, performing regular, top-down assessment of business 
impact through potential loss of people, processes, tools 
or sites alongside our fully resilient technical landscape, 
including regular testing of back-up and recovery plans. This 
all helps to bolster understanding and maximise availability 
wherever possible for the Group and its customers.
Risk Management (continued)
Technology 
Information and Cyber-security
The market for the Group’s services is in a state of constant 
innovation and change, alongside a huge growth in 
capability through acquisition and an ever-changing and 
closely monitored geo-political climate, all of which naturally 
increases the cyber-risk landscape for the Group and its 
customers. The Group monitor all short and medium-term 
implications alongside maintaining constant, pro-active 
vigilance against such risks, driven from the top down from 
policy through process and procedure into technology, 
automation, monitoring and alerting capabilities. 
The overall security stance continues to evolve, both 
internally and externally facing in order to meet the ever-
increasing threats placed upon the industry in general and 
globally. The focus here and current mitigations not only 
allows the Group to protect itself in the best ways possible, 
but also offers this capability directly to customers, helping 
them with their own internal risk. 
The Group maintains membership of some of the highest 
levels of security accreditation as part of the service it offers its 
customers. In the past year it has also implemented a revised 
Cyber Security Group Committee to further review and assist 
internal and external threats, risk, capability and strategy.
Financial Control
Market and economic conditions
Market and economic conditions are recognised as one of 
the principal risks in the current trading environment. This 
risk is mitigated by the monitoring of trading conditions and 
the constant search for ways to achieve new efficiencies in 
the business without impacting levels of service. The Board 
considers the Group is relatively well protected against 
significant customer risk due to the Group’s diverse and 
broad ranging customer base, however loss of a major 
contract remains a principal risk, as discussed below.
Loss of major contract
Failure to successfully manage our large, significant and 
complex clients could lead to a loss of significant revenue 
and possible reputational damage. To address this risk, 
Redcentric pro-actively maintain Sales Management 
Plans, hold regular customer meetings by account teams, 
aligns service delivery to sales in order to support both 
the Group’s and its customers strategies. The Group also 
operates a meaningful and accurate customer satisfaction 
methodology with feedback loop.
Capability
Competition and market pressures
Redcentric operates in a highly competitive marketplace 
and, while the Board believes that the Group enjoys 
significant strengths and advantages in competing for 
business, some of its competitors are much larger with 
considerable scale that could allow them to offer similar 
services for lower prices than the Group would be 
prepared to match. Competitors could therefore materially 
adversely impact the scale of the Group’s revenues and its 
profitability. The Group monitors competitors’ activity and 
constantly reviews its own services and prices to ensure a 
competitive position in the market is maintained. Capability 
and scale acquisitions throughout the growth strategies 
have greatly strengthened the Group’s positioning within 
the marketplace, allowing more competitive pricing (scale) 
and additional service offerings (capability).
Workforce
As a service provider the Group is dependent on the skill 
and experience of its established workforce. The Group 
could be adversely impacted if employee levels are 
not maintained. The Group continually strives to recruit 
suitably skilled and experienced employees by offering 
a challenging and rewarding work environment with 
appropriate remuneration packages relative to their skills 
and experience. The Group has offices in multiple locations 
which helps to access talent pools in various locations 
across the country.
32
33
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report

FY24 has been focused on bringing our business together as one team following the acquisitions 
of FY22 and FY23. We have made massive strides forward in this and I’m delighted to say that 
all our new colleagues have now been aligned into our respective business units and we are now 
operating as a combined business supporting all our customers to deliver a great service for 
them and their customers. 
We undertook a further review of our leadership operating 
structures in September 2023, resulting in a number of 
changes to our Operating Board structure and roles to set 
us up for the future. Further consolidating our teams brings 
massive benefits as we work on continuing to further enhance 
our collaboration across our business units and teams. 
We have specifically been focused over the last 12 months 
on creating a consistent data centre operating model, 
replicated across all our data centres sites and in also 
evolving and refining our customer support teams to 
ensure we deliver a seamless customer experience for all 
our valued customers. Our service delivery teams have, 
likewise, been aligned to our sales team, meaning we can 
work hand in hand across both service support and account 
management to best meet our customers’ needs.
We have also onboarded a small number of new colleagues 
from existing service providers as we bring additional 
services in house, enabling this expertise to be delivered for 
our customers internally and shared across the  
wider business.
We are committed to the continuation of our hybrid working 
model, ensuring we give our colleagues the much-needed 
opportunity for collaboration opportunities and the ability 
for focused work time, combining the best of both working 
practices. Following the move of the Harrogate Data Centre 
to our leading-edge West Yorkshire facility, we have also 
invested in an exciting new office environment for our 
Harrogate based colleagues, which will open in FY25. 
It has been another very busy year for all our colleagues as 
we have broken the back of our integration activity, which 
now gives us the opportunity to further focus on growing 
the business in the year ahead. I’d like to thank all our 
colleagues for their significant efforts and support over the 
last year, whether this be on integration or business as usual 
activities. We would not have delivered this strong set of 
results without their support, knowledge and contributions. 
Listening to our colleagues 
In FY20 we launched an ongoing listening programme to 
ensure we had the opportunity to hear and understand 
the views of each and every colleague in our business. As 
a result of this programme, we have already introduced a 
number of new people programmes and initiatives over 
the last four years and we will continue to evolve these in 
tandem with feedback from our teams. 
We are committed to continuing to listen to the views of our 
colleagues and launched our latest colleague survey, running 
across all colleagues and business heritages in July 2023.
I am delighted to be able to say that over the last two years 
we have increased levels of engagement to 73%, which 
given the acquisition and integration challenges,  
is an impressive outcome, significantly ahead of  
the external benchmark.
We are implementing group wide and divisional specific 
responses to the feedback and have introduced and will 
continue to introduce a number of initiatives in response to 
the feedback from our colleagues. 
Some of these include: 
•	
The launch of LinkedIn learning across the business to 
support the performance and personal development of 
our colleagues, which has seen an impressive uptake;
•	
A revision to our online performance and development 
and recognition systems which form part of 
Peoplecentric, our HR system, enabling colleagues 
with easy one-stop access to their objective and 
development actions, as well as the ability to quickly 
recognise other colleagues more easily;
•	
Continued access to hybrid working, giving colleagues 
additional flexibility to work where they will best 
achieve their daily activities;
•	
A new externally hosted whistleblowing helpline to 
give our colleagues enhanced confidence in raising and 
reporting any areas of concern confidentially;
•	
Continued access to all our internal communications, 
keeping our teams connected and engaged with 
monthly all colleague calls and our weekly recognition 
shout outs;
•	
The launch of our Brand champions who are committed 
to promoting and supporting Redcentric;
Corporate Responsibility 
Our Colleagues
Listening to our colleagues (continued) 
•	
Launch of our new Diversity and Inclusion forum to 
ensure equal opportunities for all across our business 
and ensure an inclusive working environment; and
•	
Investment in upgrades to our office spaces  
and environment.
Wellbeing 
The physical, emotional and financial wellbeing of our 
colleagues continues to be a key priority for us, and this has 
been recognised within the survey feedback and we have a 
dedicated programme of activity to ensure we continue to 
support the wellbeing of all colleagues, across a number of 
differing needs.
Physical Wellbeing
All colleagues have access to our private medical and 
permanent health insurance schemes to give peace of mind 
and security, with the knowledge help is there if required. In 
addition, we offer a scheme supporting discounts on dental 
care, physiotherapy and a range of other health discounts 
for our colleagues. We have run a number of education 
programmes over the last 12 months including online fitness 
and eating healthily, men’s mental and physical health and 
the menopause.
Emotional Wellbeing
We have continued and will continue to run our time to talk 
programme which comprises of a number of access routes 
for mental health support, led by a number of qualified 
mental health first aiders. We have also trained a number of 
additional colleagues as Mental Health First Aiders. Time 
to talk gives access to our mental health first aider team, 
access to our employee assistance scheme and supports 
a number of mental health initiatives including access to 
workshops including, personal resilience, managing stress, 
help for sleep, mindfulness and many more.
Financial Wellbeing
Financial wellbeing is becoming increasing important to 
our colleagues and we have continued to offer a number 
of schemes to help our colleagues make their money go 
further including:
•	
Continued access to our Perks scheme which  
gives access to a large number of online and high  
street discounts;
•	
Continued access to a Tastecard scheme, with 
discounts on a large number of food chains, retailers 
and theme parks;
•	
Continued access to discounted programme of 
mortgage advice to give colleagues better access to 
financial advice; and
•	
Continued access to an electric car scheme partnership 
delivered via a salary sacrifice programme which 
enables colleagues to save money on car leases whilst 
also ensuring we continue to support the environment. 
We will continue to look for additional options to support 
our colleagues over the next 12 months. 
All our colleagues also have access to our Employee 
Assistance programme which offers help and support 
across a number of key areas, including external counselling 
support and basic financial advice.
Equality and diversity 
Creating a diverse, inclusive and great place for our 
colleagues to work is top of the Group’s people agenda. 
The Group actively supports the principle of equal 
opportunities in employment and is committed to ensuring 
that individuals are treated fairly, with respect and are 
valued. The Group opposes all forms of unlawful or unfair 
discrimination on the grounds of colour, race, religion or 
belief, nationality, ethnic or national origin, sex, gender 
reassignment, sexual orientation, marital or civil partner 
status, age or disability (the “Protected Characteristics”).
It is important to the Group that no one receives less 
favourable treatment or is disadvantaged on any of the 
above grounds. Every possible step is taken to ensure that 
individuals are treated equally and fairly and that decisions 
on recruitment and selection and opportunities for training 
and promotion are based solely on objective and job-
related criteria.
We have now established a new diversity, equality and 
inclusion forum and created a new diversity and inclusion 
policy aimed to ensure we support these principles across 
the business. Our recruitment processes have been 
reviewed to ensure we recruit from a diverse workforce, and 
we will be rolling out diversity and inclusion training across 
the business in the next financial year.
Corporate Responsibility 
Our Colleagues (continued)
34
35
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Gender diversity
The average number of employees employed during the year was as follows:
Male
Female
Total
Executive Directors 
2
0
2
Ops Board
5
2
7
Senior managers
28
6
34
Other employees
500
116
616
Total average headcount
535
124
659
Whilst the gender profile of the company is in line with the industry, we are doing a number of things to address the 
male/female imbalance as outlined in the section below.
Gender pay report
Our gender pay report at the snapshot date of 5 April 
2023 showed that the overall difference between men 
and women’s earnings at the Group was 25% (mean), which 
is a slight increase on the previous year’s report of 22%. 
This increase has been driven by the acquisition of the 
Sungard businesses and is something we are committed  
to improving. 
Our gender pay gap continues to be driven by an imbalance 
of male and female colleagues at different levels across the 
organisation. The majority of females in our business continue 
to sit within the two lowest pay quartiles of the business 
which has a significant impact on our gender pay gap. We 
have however, seen a slight increase in the % of females in 
the top quartile of our business and this is something we are 
committed to continue making progress on. 
We are continuing to focus on initiatives to improve our 
gender pay gap including:
•	
Gender balanced interview panels and shortlists;
•	
An increase in female hires to the Company;
•	
Our Diversity and Inclusion forum;
•	
Family flexible policies and working patterns;
•	
Launch of our sales apprenticeship programme; and 
•	
Working closely with local schools and colleges.
Apprenticeship programmes
We have continued to support apprenticeship programmes 
across the business in FY24 supporting the development 
of our future talent pipeline and building the skills and 
capabilities of our colleagues. We currently have 16 
apprentices in the business, representing a mix of both  
new and existing colleagues. The majority of our 
apprentices over the last year are in sales, finance and 
business development.
We are also continuing to work closely with local schools, 
colleges and apprenticeship providers to attract local 
talent into our business. We are still delivering our work 
experience programme giving local students access  
to and an understanding of our business and the  
work environment.
Share scheme
The Group is a strong believer that having an effective 
employee share ownership programme helps to align 
colleagues’ interests with those of our shareholders 
and plays a key part in the attraction and retention of 
colleagues. In November 2014 the Group launched its  
SAYE option plan where colleagues contribute a monthly 
amount of up to £500 across all schemes which is saved 
over three years to buy shares in the Company at a pre-
determined price.
Corporate Responsibility 
Our Colleagues (continued)
The most recent grant was made on the 2 October 2023, with the Company granting options over a total of 352,068 
ordinary shares. These options are available for exercise from 31 October 2026, with an exercise price of 101.33p.
As at 31 March 2024, the following options were outstanding under the plan:
Grant date
Exercise price 
(p)
Opening 
options
Options 
granted
Options 
exercised
Options 
lapsed/ 
cancelled
Options 
remaining 
02-Sept-2020
119.60p
143,577
-
(96,019)
(13,545)
34,013
27-Aug-2021
108.33p
93,238
-
-
(1,826)
91,412
23-Dec-2021
99.87p
496,873
-
-
(62,718)
434,155
26-Aug-2022
96.07p
474,522
-
-
(98,549)
375,973
02-Oct-2023
101.33p
-
352,068
-
(12,446)
339,622
Total 
n/a
1,208,210
352,068
(96,019)
(189,084)
1,275,175
Charitable activity
We continue to be committed to supporting local charities 
and communities through FY24 and it is really pleasing to 
see our colleagues continuing and further embracing our 
support for charities and local/national fund raising.
We have an ongoing partnership with Generation, a national 
charity which supports underprivileged young adults into 
the workplace. 
From a charity perspective we have maintained our support 
and commitment to a number of key charities through 
colleague fundraising initiatives including:
•	
Mission Christmas
•	
Macmillan coffee morning 
•	
Children’s Heart Surgery Fund
•	
Charity Walks
•	
Yorkshire Three Peaks raising over £13,000 for 
Children’s Heart Surgery Fund
We continue to support local volunteering activity and 
fundraising by encouraging all colleagues to use their 
day’s paid volunteering leave to support causes close to 
their heart and we have seen a higher than ever uptake 
of volunteering days. In addition, colleagues are keen 
to support their own charities via a number of personal 
fundraising activities and we have seen an increase in this 
over the last 12 months. 
We are also continuing to evolve our national corporate 
social responsibility (“CSR”) strategy to support our key 
customers in their local areas and are proud to be doing so.
Health and safety
The Group is committed to maintaining high standards of 
health and safety. New starters receive health and safety 
training through our online learning management system 
during their induction period and refresher training is 
provided to all colleagues every twelve months. There was 
one RIDDOR (Reporting of Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous 
Occurrences Regulations) accident reported during the year.
All our offices and sites have been assessed through the 
course of the year and we are confident all sites comply 
with all health and safety requirements. We have introduced 
new lone working technology with an external partner, 
SoloProtect to safeguard any lone workers and this has  
been rolled out across the Company. Additional training 
has been made available for our data centre and facilities 
colleagues to support their ability to operate in a safe and 
compliant manner.
Corporate Responsibility 
Our Colleagues (continued)
36
37
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Sustainability Reporting
Within the Group, we recognise the importance of addressing the potential risks and opportunities presented by climate 
change. We are committed to being responsible and sustainable in our operations, as an IT Managed Services company.  
We are captured under The Companies (Strategic Report) (Climate-related Financial Disclosure) Regulations 2022. Therefore, 
we have produced a climate related financial disclosure and aligned it with the Task Force on Climate-related Financial 
Disclosures (TCFD). It is important to us to disclose on the four TCFD recommendations Pillars: Governance, Strategy, Risk 
Management and Metrics and Targets and the 11 recommendations, to communicate our climate change management 
to our external stakeholders. This is the first financial year that we have been legally required to produce climate related 
financial discloses. In the last financial year, we produced a voluntary TCFD report. Also, we disclose our energy usage and 
carbon emissions in a report following the Streamlined Energy & Carbon Reporting (SECR) regulation, thereby abiding by 
the Companies (Directors’ Report) and Limited Liability Partnerships (Energy and Carbon Report) Regulations 2018. Further, 
our Net Zero target and strategy enable us to align with the UK’s 2050 net zero targets, supporting our monitoring and 
managing of our emissions across the Group.
The TCFD Framework
Climate change presents noteworthy trials for businesses, compelling them to adopt measures that mitigate risks and adapt 
to the existing changes. By doing so, companies can cultivate operations that are both sustainable and resilient. The Task 
Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) was instituted by the Financial Stability Board (FSB) in 2015 with the 
purpose of formulating a series of recommendations for companies to divulge climate-related risks and opportunities. 
The TCFD has gained support from a wide array of organisations, including the G20, the International Monetary Fund (IMF), 
and the World Bank. An increasing number of companies are now embracing the practice of disclosing climate-related 
information in accordance with the TCFD framework. This framework is designed to aid companies in comprehending and 
managing climate-related risks and opportunities. It facilitates investors and other stakeholders in grasping the financial 
impacts of climate change and represents a significant stride towards tackling this issue. 
The TCFD framework encompasses 11 recommendations that are categorised into four key themes: Governance, Strategy, 
Risk Management and Metrics and Targets. By adhering to these recommendations, the Group can identify, evaluate, and 
address climate-related risks and opportunities that impact our operations.
About us
The Group is a provider of IT Managed Services. We deliver highly available Cloud, Communications, Network and Cyber 
Security solutions that help public and private sector organisations succeed. Founded in 1997, we have fast and secure data 
centres in 10 locations around the UK. 
Our Vision
•	
A trusted cloud and communications transformation partner, underpinned by strong networking and security services.
Our Mission
•	
We deliver agile, available and assured solutions that help organisations succeed.
Our Values
•	
Our values support our strategic objectives and sit at the heart of our business and our culture. We work hard to 
integrate our values into everything we do.
Proactive 
We think and act quickly
Inspired
We create excitement 
through innovation
Trusted
We do what we say  
we will
Collaborative
We work together to 
deliver a common goal
Transparent
We are open, honest 
and fair
Sustainability Reporting (continued)
Governance
The Group remains committed to a rigorous and reliable approach to identifying, monitoring and managing risk across all 
aspects of our business. Our consistent risk management approach is grounded in our core values and supports our overall 
business strategies, to ensure their success. The below table shows Redcentric’s governance structure.
The Board of Directors
Details of the Board of Directors and their experience can be found at pages 60-61.
The Board is responsible for the Group’s response to climate change. They ensure that appropriate climate management 
practices are integrated into our future business operations and financial strategy. The Board provides oversight on climate-
related risks and opportunities and annually evaluates progress in this area. The Board are supported by our third-party ESG 
specialists, Inspired Energy, who provide expertise on climate change to support this process.
The Board has the ultimate responsibility for our response to climate change, with oversight on climate-related risks and 
opportunities, which is bi-annually reviewed at Board meetings at a minimum. This is led by our Chief Executive Officer 
(“CEO”), Peter Brotherton, and Chief Finance Officer (“CFO”), David Senior, who hold responsibility for overseeing 
sustainability and regularly communicating our priorities with both the Board and key stakeholders. During FY24 ESG criteria 
were introduced in the remuneration structure of Operations Board to ensure ESG strategy is aligned with individual and 
management objectives. The Board is supported by the Committee, which aims to update the Board quarterly through  
the Managing Director of Connectivity and Communications (Nick Helman), who is a part of the Committee, enabling the 
Board to monitor and oversee progress against goals and targets associated with climate change throughout the year.  
These updates, including the updated climate risk register, enable the Board to consider climate-related issues that the 
Committee has identified as relevant to Redcentric during the review of Redcentric’s business strategy and major action 
plans. Inspired Energy provided training in March 2024 on climate change and the emerging vital themes, ensuring the 
Committee can identify and monitor changes as they arise and remain competitive within our field. This training has been 
shared with the Board as part of their climate risk register sign-off to ensure they understand the context of the risks with 
up-to-date information. 
The Committee was established in FY23, which has been delegated responsibility for reviewing and monitoring 
sustainability performance by the Board. The Committee has also delegated responsibility for identifying, assessing and 
managing climate-related risks and opportunities which is conducted annually. The Committee hosted three meetings in 
FY24. Attendance was made up of our members, 18 senior managers and Directors of the Group, covering key departments 
of our business. In the most recent Committee meeting (14 March 2024) Inspired Energy supported us with our annual 
climate scenario analysis, attended by one Board member and the wider Sustainability Committee. This resulted in an 
updated climate risk register, which ties in with the overall Redcentric risk register and assessment process, however, it is a 
separate document due to the nature and timeframes considered in the climate risk register. We will review the possibility of 
integrating the two risk registers in FY25. 
Peter Brotherton
Chief Executive 
Officer
Katie Collins
Human Resources 
Director
Nick Helman
Managing Director – 
Connectivity and 
Communications
Sustainability 
Committee (CSD is 
executive sponsor)
David Senior
Chief Financial 
Officer
Kieran Brady
Group Sales and 
Marketing Director
Paul Marding
Chief Technology 
Officer
38
39
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Sustainability Reporting (continued)
Risk Management
In our second year of following the TCFD recommendations (FY23 being voluntary adoption), we have continued to follow a 
tiered hierarchy for risk management, to ensure climate risks and opportunities are integrated seamlessly into our overall risk 
management. Each risk and opportunity are allocated a risk owner to oversee during the year, and feedback is provided to 
the Committee during annual reviews, to ensure ownership is taken by the most appropriate team and the risk is managed 
as effectively as possible. Consideration of integrating our climate risk register into the corporate risk register will be a 
priority in FY25 following the climate risk registers introduction of the central register format and risk levels at the beginning 
of the next financial year (FY25).
We are confident in our ability to respond and adapt to climate-related risks, whilst appreciating the size of impact climate-
related risks will have on businesses in the UK in the coming years. To keep on top of this we have a dynamic, detailed risk 
management framework that enables us to consider emerging climate-related risks with a business focus. The following 
steps guide our climate risk management, which has been created in line with TCFD best practice guidance. 
Identify
Our third-party ESG specialists provided an updated climate scenario analysis in FY24. Subsequently, we identified 
changes in the vulnerabilities in our sites, which we plan to conduct annually, to monitor any changes in vulnerabilities and 
opportunities, so we can act. In this financial year’s assessment, we identified three material physical risks, one material 
transition risk and three opportunities with varying impacts across our 10 sites. This included our key suppliers’ 22 sites 
within climate scenario analysis, with 22 of our suppliers vulnerable to climate-related risks and opportunities assessed to 
consider the impact of climate across our supply chain.
Assess
Within our annual physical and transition climate risk management workshops conducted with our third-party ESG 
specialists, Inspired Energy, in March 2024 (the transition workshop fell just outside the financial year April 2024), we 
discussed the impact of each risk and opportunity on the business across three scenarios (<2°C, 2-3°C and >3°C) and three 
timeframes (short (2023-2027), medium (2028-2037) and long-term (2038-2052)), analysing how each risk and opportunity 
may affect Redcentric’s operations, especially sites which are particularly vulnerable. Once discussing each risk and 
opportunity, an individual magnitude and likelihood score was assigned to each climate-related risk and opportunity  
(see Tables 7-9) based on the expertise shared by our ESG specialists. 
Appraise
Following the initial scoring, we discussed all mitigation measures that took place, to reduce the impact of the risk and take 
advantage of the opportunities. The mitigation identification is supplemented by a broader internal stakeholder review 
conducted by our ESG specialists of Redcentric’s risks and mitigations to supplement the climate management system 
beyond the direct risk owners in the Sustainability Committee.
Considering all mitigation and adaptation measures in place, the Group reassessed the magnitude and likelihood of the risks 
and opportunities based on the true vulnerabilities, giving a final residual risk score which falls under risk levels of very low, 
low, medium, high and very high (classification of the risks can be found within Tables 4,5 and 6). 
Following the climate risk management workshops, we updated our climate risk management framework that feeds into our 
business’s existing risk management process, to ensure that our operations remain resilient to climate change. For the next 
climate-related financial disclosure report, we intend to perform detailed financial modelling of the climate-related risks with 
specific Redcentric-focused estimates of the size of financial impact beyond the consideration in Tables 7-9.
Address
The risks and opportunities that were deemed material were assessed, and additional mitigation control measures were 
introduced to manage opportunities and minimise the risks. These actions will be considered at the next annual risk meeting 
where progress will be reported. The overall business represented by the Committee is responsible for managing the scope 
1, 2 and 3 reductions in line with our net zero strategy. As identified in our physical and transition risks, management of our 
scope 1 and 2 emissions is a key approach to prevent the most serious impacts of climate change. 
The final result of the four-part risk management system is an updated risk register, for which the Committee  
holds responsibility.
Sustainability Reporting (continued)
Strategy
Climate Change has been categorised as a principal risk to Redcentric’s overall business since August 2021, where  
the Group’s overarching Risk Committee (material risks are a medium risk or higher) rated climate change as material  
to the business. Climate change has already impacted our operations and is deemed a material risk. Managing and 
mitigating these issues through a clear strategy ensures that our growth plan, customer delivery, and shareholders’  
returns are not affected. 
Annually, our compliance team refine our risk matrix, to identify any emerging risks or opportunities for the business 
adequately. This is conducted through climate scenario analysis, where all Redcentric’s sites (10) and key supplier sites  
(22) are considered over three warming pathways and time horizons. Through this analysis, we can adapt and mitigate the 
risks climate change poses for our operations. This financial year, we have included key suppliers in our climate scenario 
analysis, to consider the whole supply chain impact and indirect risks and opportunities that Redcentric may experience due 
to climate change. Climate-related risks and opportunities which have been considered material (risk rating of a medium or 
higher impact) are outlined in Tables 7, 8 and 9. This information feeds directly into our operations and financial planning. 
Climate Scenarios
The three warming scenarios used in our analysis are based on the predicted increase in global average temperatures by 
2100, compared to the pre-industrial era. Our climate modelling was conducted to align with the UK net zero target by 
2050. Each scenario highlights significant points where parts of the climate cannot return to normal, known as a tipping 
point. Tipping points are elements of the Earth’s system that have the potential to change abruptly in response to warming. 
A small change marks a point of no return and permanently alters our climate. 
Climate scenarios are future projections of our climate, considered under differing potential warming pathways. Climate 
scenarios are a culmination of several climate models and internationally established frameworks. These include the 
International Energy Agency’s World Energy Models (“WEM”), the Shared Socioeconomic Pathways (“SSPs”): Climate 
Natural Catastrophe Damage Model, the Coordinated Regional Climate Downscaling Experiment (CORDEX) regional 
climate forecasts, and Integrated Assessment Models (“IAM”). While these models offer detailed insights into potential 
futures, their accuracy is not guaranteed. Discrepancies between model predictions and real-world observations are 
common when evaluating our climate, potential exaggerations or underestimations of climate variables may occur.
Table 1: A table to show the three warming pathway scenarios. 
Scenario Warming Pathways 
Below 2oC (“Proactive”) Scenario:
Organisations adhere to a coordinated and orderly transition to a low-carbon economy, aligning closely with the Paris 
Agreement and Science Based Targets Initiative (1.5°C), for an orderly and coordinated transition to a low-carbon economy.
Under the proactive scenario, Redcentric will likely be exposed to more regulatory and consumer demands, with the 
opportunity to shift operations further towards lower-emission and energy-efficient business operations to meet market needs. 
Between 2-3oC (“Reactive”) Scenario:
Policies and legislation are introduced with a staggered effect, with inconsistent levels of action being taken that align 
with current forecasts.
Redcentric may experience the effects of climate tipping points and the impacts of severe physical risks across several sites. 
Above 3oC (“Inactive”) Scenario:
Minimal climate action is taken, and emissions go unchecked, resulting in a worst-case climate scenario.
The inactive scenario appears to be the most impactful on Redcentric’s business model, forcing us to adapt to physical 
climate risks, likely without green financing opportunities at a significant cost. In addition, it may be too late to benefit from 
the opportunities we highlighted in Table 8 in this scenario.
40
41
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Sustainability Reporting (continued)
Strategy (continued)
Climate Scenarios (continued)
Table 2: A table to show the three-time horizons. 
Time Horizons 
Short-term (2023-2027): 
The greatest changes would be in the proactive scenario over this time period, in the next few years. Although, we do not have 
any material risks in this time horizon. Therefore, there is no major potential impact on Redcentric in the short-term scenario. 
Medium-term (2028-2037):
This scenario aligns with our near-term scope 1, 2 and 3 targets outlined in the Metrics and Targets section. In this period, 
physical impacts would be experienced, and in the reactive scenarios, policies will tighten.
Long-term (2038-2052):
This scenario is consistent with our net zero target and the UK Government’s net zero pledge by 2050. The greatest physical 
impacts would be experienced in this period in the inactive scenario. This period is where most of our material physical risks 
are likely to be experienced. 
Redcentric aims to conduct climate scenario analysis on our sites every financial year, to update our knowledge and 
categorisation of our physical and transition risks. This financial year we conducted our physical climate risk workshop with 
the Committee in March 2024. However, due to staff constraints, the transition climate risk workshop was not conducted 
until April 2024, which falls into the following financial year. 
During these sessions using last year’s data alongside updated site data and 22 of our key supplier sites, we discussed and 
rated our risks and opportunities, providing a risk rating for each based on the likelihood and magnitude of impact with 
our 5x5 RAG (red, amber and green) rating system (Tables 3, 4 and 5) to provide a potential impact figure. The Committee 
discussed the current mitigation measures and reassessed the likelihood and magnitude of each climate-related risk and 
opportunity to consider a more accurate risk score. The scores identified post-mitigation measures which are disclosed with 
each risk and opportunity. Risks that were considered material (risk rating of a medium or higher impact) are outlined in 
Tables 6, 7 and 8. We will endeavour to undergo this analysis annually.
Table 3: A table to show our likelihood rating process. 
Rating 
Likelihood Rating Description
5 – Very High 
It is almost certain that the risk will occur, as there are no controls in place, or it has 
happened in the past.
4 – High
It is highly possible that the risk will occur, as there is limited or no mitigation in place.
3 – Medium
It is possible that the risk will occur, as only some mitigation is in place.
2 – Low
It is unlikely that the risk will manifest, as good mitigation levels are in place and tested 
(where possible).
1 – Very Low
It is highly improbable that the risk will occur, as the controls in place are considered 
excellent. 
Sustainability Reporting (continued)
Strategy (continued)
Climate Scenarios (continued)
Table 4: A table to show the magnitude rating process.
Risk Value
Operational
Financial
Legal
Compliance
Reputational 
damage
1 – Very Low
No impact.
No financial 
impact.
None.
None.
None.
2 – Low
Minor impact on 
operations.
Minor 
financial 
impact.
None.
None.
Staff aware, loss 
of morale, single 
customer aware.
3 – Medium
Some impact on 
operational functions 
that may be visible to staff 
or customers.
Some 
financial 
loss.
Breach of laws, 
regulations or 
contracts, leading 
to litigation or 
prosecution and 
fines.
Potential breach of 
some compliance 
obligations 
or major non- 
conformance.
Multiple 
customers and 
businesses 
aware, local 
media coverage.
4 – High
Operations unable to 
function adequately 
to meet some internal 
or customer service 
requirements.
Significant 
financial 
loss.
Breach of laws, 
regulations or 
contracts, leading 
to litigation or 
prosecution and 
significant fines.
Breach of 
compliance 
obligations leading 
to potential loss of 
certification.
Widespread 
local or limited 
national media 
coverage.
5 – Very High
Business threatened 
due to the inability to 
support staff or customers 
at a wholesale level, 
breaches of Service Level 
Agreements (SLAs), huge 
levels of critical service 
downtime etc.
Major 
financial 
losses/
business 
threatened
Breach of laws or 
regulations leading 
to prosecution and 
imprisonment.
Loss of one or 
more certified 
obligations or 
frameworks leading 
to potential loss 
of large revenue 
streams and/or 
fines.
Widespread 
national media 
coverage.
Table 5: A table to show the risk rating scale. 
Rating
Measure
Rating Description
Low
1 - 24
No further activity necessary. 
The low level of risk does not justify additional controls being put in 
place.
Medium
25 - 48
Management will apply their judgement as to whether the risks are 
acceptable. 
Controls will be applied as appropriate.
High
49 - 75
Management will select appropriate controls.
Tables 6 to 8 show the climate-related risks and opportunities, which were rated medium or higher and deemed material 
to Redcentric’s business operations, based on the ratings described in Tables 3, 4 and 5. The transition risks impact the 
overall business, whilst the physical (divided by acute and chronic) risks impact specific locations (Table 7). Six physical risks, 
thirteen transition risks and five opportunities were assessed during this process (of a medium risk or higher to Redcentric). 
One transition risk, three physical risks and three opportunities were deemed material.
42
43
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Sustainability Reporting (continued)
Strategy (continued)
Climate Scenarios (continued)
Table 6: A table showing the transition risks (risks related to the transition to a low-carbon economy) which may impact 
Redcentric over time. 
Climate-related Risk
Potential Impact Area
Risk Mitigation
1.1 Legal – Reporting 
requirements will 
increase due to 
climate change
      Scenario: <2°C 
and 2-3°C 
      Timeframe: 
Short – Medium 
term (2023-2037)
      Risk Level: Medium
Leading up to the UK net zero target of 2050, it is 
likely that stricter regulations (such as SECR, Energy 
Saving Opportunity Scheme (ESOS), etc.) are going 
to be required of businesses, to monitor and reduce 
energy usage and emissions. Compliance costs 
including consultancy fees and internal resources  
will rise with increased regulation. Emission reporting 
may require verification, accelerating calculation 
turnaround, with higher costs. Non-compliance 
could lead to litigation and reputational damage. 
While the Task Force on Nature-related Financial 
Disclosures (TNFD) regulations are currently 
voluntary, stakeholders may anticipate mandatory 
implementation. In the EU, proposed legislation  
aims to restrict misleading climate claims and 
introduce a Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism 
(CBAM). Similar measures are under consideration  
in the UK, potentially taking effect in 2026.
Financial impact area: Expenditure in directly  
incurred costs.
Our ESG team will research opportunities 
to reduce energy use from our data centres 
and discuss any emerging regulations on 
products and services.
However, due to the nature of our business 
focusing more on providing services over 
products, we do not anticipate this risk to 
have a big impact.
We have worked with third-party ESG 
specialists who keep us updated on any 
new or proposed regulations from the 
perspective of climate change.
Related Metrics: Scope 1, 2 and 3 
emissions and Net Zero Strategy.
Table 7: A table showing the physical risks (related to the physical impacts of climate change) that may impact Redcentric 
over time.
Climate- 
related Risk
Potential Impact Area
Risk Mitigation
1.1 Physical Risk – 
Acute – Severity 
of flooding will 
increase 
      Scenario: 2-3°C 
and >3°C
      Timeframe:  
Medium – Long 
Term (2028-2052)
      Risk Level: Medium
A total of ten Redcentric sites were 
considered under our climate scenario 
analysis and seven sites (including 
Cambridge, West Yorkshire and London West) 
were classified as vulnerable to the impacts 
of flooding. Possibility of short circuits which 
can cause serious damage, fires or small-scale 
explosions. The effects of water and moisture 
can cause long-term damage, resulting in 
insulation damage, corrosion, cable and 
equipment failure. Damages could require 
equipment to be replaced, leading to an 
increase in capital spend. Reliance on local 
electricity supply to power data centres could 
lead to disruptions in operations. In addition, 
fourteen of our key suppliers (64%) were 
found to be vulnerable to flooding, showing 
our risk across the business, which requires 
us to consider our mitigations with this 
information to ensure preparedness.
Financial impact area: Expenditure in 
directly incurred costs.
We proactively monitor extreme weather events and 
receive updates from the environmental agency, 
which helps us act upon alerts and extreme weather 
warnings. Annual BCDR (Business Continuity and 
Disaster Recovery) Crisis Management Exercises 
were held in February 2024. These exercises 
considered flooding as the theoretical crisis event 
and included all the teams into its scope.
Our staff can work from home if necessary. Some 
of our sites have mitigation measures, to deal with 
flooding events, or are situated on elevated ground, 
thereby reducing the impact. We have ensured we 
are comprehensively covered by insurance on the 
sites most at risk from flooding. In the long-term, 
we will ensure that drainage systems at our sites are 
well maintained and serviced. To reduce the physical 
effects of floods at these sites, adequate upkeep 
of drainage networks will be conducted along with 
continuous robust flood risk assessments.
Related Metrics: Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions and 
Net Zero Strategy.
Sustainability Reporting (continued)
Strategy (continued)
Climate Scenarios (continued)
Table 7 continued: A table showing the physical risks (related to the physical impacts of climate change) that may impact 
Redcentric over time.
Climate-related Risk
Potential Impact Area
Risk Mitigation
1.2 Physical Risk – 
Acute – Extreme 
Heat 
      Scenario: 2-3°C 
and >3°C
      Timeframe: Short-
Long term 
(2023-2052)
      Risk Level: Medium
All ten of our sites and 22 of our supplier’s 
sites are vulnerable to the impacts of 
extreme heat. Extreme heat can reduce staff 
productivity and cause physical damage to 
facilities, resulting in profit loss. Increased 
demand for cooling, such as air-conditioning, 
raises energy costs and emissions in sites 
such as Shoreditch. Employees may seek 
companies with cooling during heatwaves. 
Construction materials may change 
properties in extreme heat. Power disruptions 
can harm customers, and data centres may 
overload, leading to outages and data loss.
Financial impact area: Expenditure in directly 
incurred costs.
Data centres must be cooled to operate under 
their capacity, which is optimal. We are currently 
on a programme of equipping our data centres 
to deal with the increasing heatwaves over the 
medium to long-term. This has and will continue 
to require capital expenditure investment to 
deliver, however two of our biggest sites, London 
West and Woking, have seen this investment in 
FY24. This enhanced cooling infrastructure will 
see both reduced carbon emissions and reduced 
operating costs during warmer periods.
Related Metrics: Scope 1 and 2 emissions and 
Net Zero Strategy.
1.3 Physical Risk – 
Chronic – 
Rising Mean 
Temperatures 
      Scenario: 2-3°C 
and >3°C
      Timeframe: Long – 
Term (2038-2052)
      Risk Level: Medium
All ten of our sites from Reading to West 
Yorkshire are vulnerable to the impacts 
of rising mean temperatures. Damage to 
property and disruption to maintenance 
services can incur financial losses. Costs 
arise from installing and maintaining air 
conditioning, to meet new building standards 
for comfortable working temperatures. 
Increased energy usage and cooling needs 
escalate expenses. Heat-related illnesses 
cause absenteeism, reducing productivity. 
Globally, up to 2% of working hours are 
lost annually, due to extreme temperatures, 
impacting efficiency. Temperature fluctuations 
can impair computing capacities, posing 
potential revenue challenges for Redcentric. 
This may be further impacted by supply chain 
issues with difficulty in securing stock with all 
22 of our suppliers being vulnerable to rising 
mean temperatures.
Financial impact area: Expenditure in directly 
incurred costs.
Data centres must be cooled to operate under 
their capacity, which is optimal. We are currently 
on a programme of equipping our data centres 
to deal with the increasing heatwaves over the 
medium to long-term. This has and will continue 
to require capital expenditure investment to 
deliver, however two of our biggest sites, London 
West and Woking, have seen this investment in 
FY24. This enhanced cooling infrastructure will 
see both reduced carbon emissions and reduced 
operating costs during warmer periods.
Outside of the data centres, our presence is 
mainly limited to the office space in Harrogate 
and York, which is comparatively small, and 
impact expected to be minimal. A large 
proportion of the workforce work remotely. 
Geographically speaking whilst globally extreme 
heat can cause workforce issues, it is not 
expected that a 2-3 °C increase in the UK would 
have a material impact on the workforce and its 
productivity. Management of the impacts will 
be conducted on a case-by-case basis that is 
monitored where weather warnings are given, 
and support provided for employees through 
their managers as the first port of call. 
Related Metrics: Scope 1 and 2 emissions and 
Net Zero Strategy.
44
45
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Sustainability Reporting (continued)
Strategy (continued)
Climate Scenarios (continued)
Table 8: A table showing the climate opportunities which may impact Redcentric.
Climate-related 
Opportunity
Potential Impact Area
Opportunity Management
1.1 Resource 
Efficiency –  
Use of energy-
efficient 
technology
      Scenario:  
<2°C and 
2-3°C 
      Timeframe: Short-
Medium term 
(2023-2037)
      Opportunity 
Level: Medium
We have initiated our net zero journey, by collaborating 
with third-party ESG specialists, to establish achievable 
GHG targets, aligned with the UK’s 2050 net zero strategy. 
We can deploy energy-efficient technology throughout 
our operations. Although this technology may involve high 
capital costs, it enhances process efficiencies, resulting 
in reduced energy consumption and lower energy costs. 
The resultant energy savings yield rapid payback periods, 
generating net financial gains over the technology’s lifespan. 
Investing in water and energy efficiency technology, can 
bolster operational resilience, particularly in sites vulnerable 
to flooding and water stress. Additional strategies such as 
borehole implementation and natural cooling methods like 
greenery-covered walls and roofs contribute to efficient water 
usage and temperature regulation.
Financial impact area: Reduction in operating expenses 
because of increased efficiency (e.g., energy costs).
We can position ourselves to be ready 
for changing customer demands 
as we are on our net zero journey. 
Substituting current technology in data 
centres would come at a cost to the 
business. However, we are undergoing 
measures to improve energy efficiency 
by 40%. The replacement of inefficient 
water chillers with gel cooling in the  
London West site will be progressed 
in FY25, significantly accelerating 
consumption reduction.
Related Metrics: Scope 1 and 2 
emissions and Net Zero Strategy.
1.2 Product and 
Services – New low-
emission product 
and service lines
      Scenario:  
<2°C and -3°C 
      Timeframe: Short 
– Medium term 
(2023-2037)
      Opportunity Level: 
Medium
Organisations that innovate and develop new low-
emission products and services, may improve their 
competitive position and capitalise on shifting consumer 
and producer preferences. Consumer goods and services 
place greater emphasis on a product’s carbon footprint in 
its marketing and labelling (e.g., travel, food, beverage 
and consumer staples, mobility, printing, fashion, and 
recycling services). Producer goods highlight the reduction 
of emissions (e.g., adoption of energy-efficiency measures 
along the supply chain).
Financial impact area: New revenue streams.
Our marketing teams host quarterly 
events tailored to specific sectors, 
engaging current and potential 
customers to better understand their 
needs. The takeaways from events are 
communicated across the business. 
This helps to have a fair understanding 
of the changing market demands 
and then to offer any changes to our 
services accordingly.
Related Metrics: Scope 1.
1.3 Resilience – 
The business is 
adapted and 
positioned to 
deal with climate 
change
      Scenario:  
<2°C and 2-3°C 
      Timeframe: Short-
Medium term  
(2023-2037)
      Opportunity Level: 
Medium
The concept of climate resilience involves organisations 
developing adaptive capacity to respond to climate 
change to better manage the associated risks and seize 
opportunities, including the ability to respond to transition 
risks and physical risks. Opportunities related to resilience 
may be especially relevant for organisations with long-
lived fixed assets or extensive supply or distribution 
networks (those that depend critically on utility and 
infrastructure networks or natural resources in their value 
chain and those that may require longer-term financing 
and investment).
Financial impact area: Expenses for developing an 
adaptive strategy.
We have initiated our net zero journey, 
by collaborating with third-party ESG 
specialists, to establish achievable 
carbon targets, aligned with the UK’s 
2050 net zero strategy. We have hosted 
workshops, to understand our risks and 
how we can adopt mitigation measures 
for physical and transition risks. We will 
publish a TCFD report, to communicate 
our efforts to stakeholders annually. We 
created the Committee in FY23 and 
established a net zero strategy with an 
aim to validate near-term and long-
term targets with the Science Based 
Target initiative (SBTi) in FY25.
Related Metrics: Scope 1, 2 and 3 
emissions and Net Zero Strategy.
Sustainability Reporting (continued)
Strategy (continued)
Climate Scenarios (continued)
Our climate scenario analysis physical and transition risks workshops completed across March and April 2024 will result in 
an updated risk register to reflect any changes of the vulnerabilities of our sites and business overall from climate change. 
Within the risk register, we categorise the financial impact area to ensure that the risks are considered when undergoing 
financial planning and relevant strategies. In addition, the risk owners set are relevant to the business area the risk or 
opportunities will most likely impact, enabling their individual budgets to be informed by this knowledge. This is an example 
of where we implement the TCFD principle of strong governance from the top down of our risk management, to assist us 
with our everyday business as well as our annual reporting. 
Overall, we feel that we are well prepared and resilient to the transition to a low carbon economy consistent with a 2°C 
scenario, with only one material transition risk and three physical risks identified in the workshops. Our strong mitigation 
measures established as a result of having analysed our risks in the previous financial year will have even greater oversight in 
FY25 with the climate risk registers integration into the company wide register.
Metrics & Targets
Our goal for the world is to be net zero by FY50. Net zero requires a concerted effort over time to eliminate GHG emissions, 
with compensatory measures as a final step for any emissions that can’t be reduced. The SBTi net-zero standard requires 
a 90% reduction in emissions prior to any residual offsets, up to 10% of the baseline, being offset using carbon removal 
offsets. This is supported by our roadmap to meet our target, with interim targets and a strategy to ensure we meet these 
reductions:
1.	
Net-zero (at least 90% absolute reduction) Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions by FY50, from a FY22 base year.
2.	
86% of suppliers (by spend) covering Scope 3 Category 1 and Category 2 will have science-based targets by FY28.
3.	
42% absolute reduction in Scope 1 and 2 emissions by FY30, from a FY22 base year.
Our Scope 1 and 2 emissions have a separate target to our scope 3 due to the complexity of collating scope 3 data, the 
breadth it covers and the time it will take to reduce. To achieve our targets for scope 1 and 2 we would need an annual 
average reduction of 5% per year and for Scope 3 of 4% per year (this was calculated as part of the Net Zero Strategy). We 
currently only disclose on Transportation (Category 6) of Scope 3, and our Scope 3 emissions are under 40% of our total 
emissions. Our full relevant Scope 3 emissions across categories 1-15 will be reported next financial year (FY25).
We summarise our energy usage, associated emissions, energy efficiency actions and energy performance for the Group, 
under the government policy Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (“SECR”), as implemented by the Companies 
(Directors’ Report) and Limited Liability Partnerships (Energy and Carbon Report) Regulations 2018. We do not currently 
have wider environmental targets. For example, we currently do not have targets for waste and water. Although, we aim to 
reduce our overall negative environmental impact, they are not currently material to the business. 
We define the emissions discussed as Scope 1 as our direct emissions from sources we own; Scope 2 our indirect emissions 
from our purchased utilities and Scope 3 all other emissions resulting from our activities. The management of scopes 1 and 2 
will enable us to manage all risks in Tables 6 and 7 whilst enabling us to take advantage of most opportunities in Table 8. 
 
46
47
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Sustainability Reporting (continued)
Metrics & Targets (continued)
The data below (including the Scope 1, 2 and 3 consumption and CO2e emissions data) was developed and calculated using 
the GHG Protocol –A Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard, Greenhouse Gas Protocol –Scope 2 Guidance and 
Environmental Reporting Guidelines: Including Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting Guidance. We are currently only 
disclosing under Category 7 (employee commuting) as required by SECR. These calculations were conducted by, but not 
assured by, Inspired Energy. 
Table 9: A table to show the Group’s total energy consumption (kWh) for SECR.
Utility and Scope
FY24 Consumption (kWh)
FY22* Consumption (kWh)
Scope 1 Total
322,523
90,796
Gaseous and other fuels (Scope 1)
270,212
90,796
Transportation (Scope 1)
52,311
N/a**
Scope 2 Total
89,569,095
18,916,332
Grid-Supplied Electricity (Scope 2)
89,569,095
18,916,332
Scope 3 Total
351,866
218,058
Transportation (Scope 3)
351,866
218,058
Total
90,243,484
19,225,186
*FY22 is the base year.
**The base year of FY22 Consumption (kWh) did not have Scope 1 transport, as company cars were introduced after this baseline financial year.
We are currently off target from our original net zero target reductions against our base year of FY22 due to significant 
changes to our business scale and composition following the acquisitions across FY22 and FY23, particularly with respect 
to 4D Data Centres and Sungard, which have given us a significantly larger data centre portfolio. A revision of our metrics 
and targets will be conducted with the support of our third-party ESG consultants next financial year (FY25) to ensure they 
reflect the Group’s current scale. 
Redcentric’s Scope 1 direct and Scope 3 indirect emissions (combustion of natural gas and transportation fuels) for this 
reporting year are 129.29 tCO2e, resulting from the direct combustion of 674,389 kWh of fuel. This represents a carbon 
reduction of 53.88% from last year ending March 2023 (Table 10). We use our energy consumption as a KPI in relation to our 
climate risks, for example, our risk 1.2 of Extreme Heat, which will increase our scope 1 and 2 emissions.
Scope 2 indirect emissions (purchased electricity) for this reporting year are 18,547.46 tCO2e, resulting from the 
consumption of 89,569,095 kWh of electricity purchased and consumed in day-to-day business operations. This represents 
a carbon increase of 42.95% from FY23 (Table 10) reflecting 12 months of emissions from the Sungard and 4D Data Centre 
sites (approx. 9 months in FY23).
Sustainability Reporting (continued)
Metrics & Targets (continued)
Table 10: A table to show the Group’s total emissions over the past three financial years (SECR data) (tCO2e).
Utility and Scope
FY24 Emissions 
(tCO2e)
FY23 Emissions 
(tCO2e) restated*
FY22 Emissions 
(tCO2e)
% Change 
between FY24 
and FY22
Location-based
Location-based
Location-based
Scope 1 Total
48.27
231.20 (191.40*)
23.27
107.4%
Gaseous and other fuels 
(Scope 1)
35.78
191.40
23.27
53.8%
Transportation (Scope 1)
12.49
39.80 (0.0*)
N/a**
N/a**
Scope 2 Total
18,547.46
12,974.92 (10,055.40*)
4,016.50
361.8%
Grid-Supplied Electricity 
(Scope 2)
18,547.46
12,974.92 (10,055.40*)
4,016.50
361.8%
Scope 3 Total
81.02
49.14 (88.94*)
50.86
59.3%
Transportation (Scope 3)
81.02
49.14 (88.94*)
50.86
59.3%
Total 
18,676.75
13,255.27 (10,335.74*)
4,090.63
356.6%
* FY23 figures have been restated due to data improvements and a widening of scope cover. The amount in brackets is the original FY23 figure. 
See detail at end of Metrics and Targets section, page 50.
**The base year of FY22 Consumption (kWh) did not have Scope 1 broken down by transport, as company cars were introduced after this 
financial year.
Fuels emissions (Scope 1) have decreased in FY24 by 79% compared to the previous reporting year. Redcentric reduced its 
oil usage in FY24 as a result of reduced testing of generators at its Data Centres, which is the key driver to oil usage.
Electricity (Scope 2) has increased by 42.95% compared to the last reporting year. The highest electricity consumption was 
observed at the London West and Woking sites. The key driver to increased Electricity usage year on year has been the full 
year effect of the Sungard and 4D Data Centres acquisition, for which there are only 9 months of usage in the prior year. 
As both acquisitions came with significant Data centre estates (including London West and Woking), they have resulted in 
significant increase in electricity usage compared to FY23. 
Transport emissions have increased in FY24 by 5.14% compared to the previous reporting year. The observed increase in 
figures can be attributed to the cumulative effect of the acquisitions over the full year, as well as increased travel between 
Redcentric’s larger data centre estate.
48
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report
49

Sustainability Reporting (continued)
Metrics & Targets (continued)
Table 11: The Group’s UK Location-based emissions intensity metric
Utility and Scope
FY24
FY23 restated*
% Change
All Scopes tCO2e per m2
0.6606
0.4689 (0.34*)
+40.9%
* FY23 intensity metric has been restated; see detail below. The amount in brackets is the original FY23 figure.
Following a detailed investigation of Redcentric’s portfolio, energy consumption and emissions, three additional sites have 
been included in the FY23 calculations and the electricity usage have been restated accordingly.
In addition, increased data knowledge has meant FY23’s transport emissions (Scope 3) have been divided into Scope 1 and 
Scope 3, providing a fairer representation of fuel usage. As a result, both Scope 1 and Scope 3 figures have been restated 
for the previous period. Following a revision of the property portfolio area from 29,960m2 to 28,271m2 (primarily to exclude 
car parking space previously included) the reported intensity metric has been restated for FY23.
Energy efficiency measures ongoing and undertaken throughout FY24 in line with the Group’s commitment to emission 
reductions are outlined below.
Redcentric upgraded its cooling system at its London West site in this reporting year. Three existing chillers were replaced 
with new ones with built-in dry air coolers. This upgrade has improved cooling efficiency, reduced energy consumption, 
and lowered cooling costs. The new chillers will provide better cooling performance while using less energy, resulting in 
a sustainable and cost-effective solution for Redcentric.
In this reporting year, Redcentric has procured an electric van. Choosing an electric van will lead to reduced emissions, 
combating air pollution and climate change, and promoting sustainability by decreasing reliance on fossil fuels and 
supporting renewable energy sources.
Measures prioritised for implementation in FY25 include the replacement of certain Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 
systems across our Data Centre estate. The Group plan to move two Megavolt Amps (MVA) of capacity to a more efficient 
UPS system. In addition, we plan to consolidate data halls and associated power supply to reduce the number of UPSs in 
service, thereby reducing overall power consumption and emissions.
Peter Brotherton 
Chief Executive Officer 
15 August 2024
51
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Strategic Report
Strategic Report
50
One of the advantages of 
having worked with Redcentric 
for some years is that we 
have built up a great degree 
of mutual trust. Redcentric 
understands very clearly what it 
is we’re trying to create here.
“
”
51

Introduction to Governance
The Board recognises the importance of high standards of corporate governance and integrity. It is committed to effective 
corporate governance as the basis for delivering long-term value growth and for meeting shareholder expectations for 
proper oversight and leadership of the business. I am responsible, as Chairman of the Board, for corporate governance 
within the Group and the Board is committed to maintaining a strong governance and ethical structure that supports and 
sustains its decision making. We believe that having good corporate governance is fundamental to pursue success for the 
Group and its stakeholders. As such, the Company has adopted the Quoted Companies Alliance Code for Small & Mid-sized 
Quoted Companies 2018 (the “Code”) as its benchmark for governance matters. At the date of this Report, we believe that 
we are fully in compliance with the Code and were also fully compliant for the comparative period. 
This section of the Report sets out how the Group has applied and complies with the principles of the QCA Code. We will 
continue to review and update our approach and will update our Corporate Governance statement in the AIM Rule 26 
section of the Group’s website.
Nick Bate 
Chairman
15 August 2024
Corporate Governance
Governance 
Principle
Application
Principle 1 
Establish a strategy 
and business 
model which 
promotes long-
term value for 
shareholders
The Group’s business model and strategy is discussed within the Chief Executive’s Review on  
pages 9-11. 
Details of the key risks and challenges facing the Group and the high-level management of such are 
outlined on pages 32-33. The Group continues to operate a tiered hierarchy for risk management, 
with functional management of direct risks and consistent measures across all functions, and escalation 
of significant value risks, along with principal corporate risks, to the Group’s corporate risk register.  
The corporate risk register is shared and refined with the Audit Committee and Board at key intervals  
in the year.
Principle 2 
Seek to understand 
and meet 
shareholder needs 
and expectation
The Group continues to be committed to engaging with its shareholders to ensure that the strategy 
and business model and key events of the Company are clearly shared and understood. The Group 
also took the decision to appoint Oliver Scott, partner at Kestrel which is the Company’s largest 
shareholder, as a Non-Executive Director (non-independent) of the Company in December 2023. The 
Board believes that the disclosures of this Report provide information necessary for shareholders to 
assess the Group’s performance, business model and strategy. Hard copies of the Report are issued to 
all shareholders that have requested them and copies are also available on the Group’s website. The 
Group’s half year report is also available on the Group’s website and the Group makes full use of the 
website to provide information to the shareholders and other interested parties.
The Company uses regulatory announcements through RNS to ensure that important news is 
shared with all shareholder and potential shareholders in a clear and uniform way and often issues 
announcements beyond those it is obliged to make.
The Executive Directors are also in regular contact with the Company’s shareholders and brief the 
Board on feedback and any shareholder issues. In FY24, investor briefings and roadshows were held at 
regular intervals, including following announcement of the preliminary and interim results, and other 
ad-hoc one-to-one meetings with key investors and potential investors were also held through the year 
to discuss the Group’s strategy and shareholder expectations, amongst other things. 
There is also regular dialogue with shareholders through the Company’s corporate broker, Cavendish 
Capital Markets Limited (“Cavendish”), who keep the Board abreast of shareholder expectations and 
reactions and assist in setting up meetings with potential investors. Any reports from analysts that refer 
to the Company or cover the sector are circulated to the Board to support their understanding of the 
views of the investment community. Cavendish, as broker, provides feedback directly to the Board from 
shareholder meetings and events such as the investor days. An update on key shareholding changes 
and any relevant investor sentiment is also provided in each Board report and Board meeting. 
There is a dedicated investor relations contact email address by which shareholders or investors may 
contact the Company (investorrelations@redcentricplc.com) and the Company Secretary also deals 
with a number of written queries throughout the year along with the Company’s registrar, Link Group.
The Chair and other Non-Executive Directors will always make themselves available to shareholders. 
The AGM is a key opportunity for this, with shareholders being given the opportunity to raise 
questions during the AGM and the Board being available both prior to and after the meeting for 
further discussion with shareholders. We are pleased to once again be able to welcome shareholders 
in person to our AGM this year. To ensure that shareholders who are unable or would rather not attend 
the AGM have the ability to ask questions of the Board, the Board shall accept any questions relating 
to the business being dealt with at the AGM which are submitted by shareholders in advance to the 
Company. Any such questions should be sent to investorrelations@redcentricplc.com so as to be 
received by no later than 5 p.m. on Friday 20 September 2024 and the Company will publish questions 
and responses on the Group’s website in advance of the AGM.
The voting record at the Company’s general meetings is monitored and we are pleased that all 
resolutions were passed by shareholders at the 2023 AGM. 
52
53
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Governance
Governance
Helping organisations succeed with solutions that deliver  
assured availability, smarter working and organisational agility.
Connectivity
Communication
Cloud
Cyber Security

Corporate Governance (continued)
Governance 
Principle
Application
Principle 3 
Take into account 
wider stakeholder 
and social 
responsibilities  
and their 
implications for 
long-term success
The Board recognises that the long-term success of the business relies on a number of key 
stakeholders, as described on pages 28-30 and pages 34-37, including colleagues and customers 
and that engagement with these key stakeholders is fundamental to helping the Board make the best 
business decisions. 
COLLEAGUES 
Having the right colleagues in the right places continues to be critical to the success of the wider 
business. Our commitment to ensuring we maintain a high-performance culture driven by the 
engagement of our colleagues continued through FY24. 
We ran our first combined Group engagement survey in June 2023, with an incredibly strong 
engagement index of 73%, outperforming the general workforce engagement index of 65%. Whilst this 
is clearly something to celebrate, we are also committed to a continued focus on the engagement of 
our colleagues and improvement in their working environment and we are now delivering against both 
Group and local action plans to maintain and improve our engagement levels. 
FY23 was focused on the initial integration of our new colleagues, FY24 has been focused on the 
creation of a “one Redcentric” team and culture. 
In FY24 the Group has invested in improvements in our sites and physical working environment, 
creating spaces which enhance and support our colleagues’ productivity. We have maintained our 
approach to hybrid working which has given access to a broader and better national talent pool. 
Our colleagues have embraced the access to LinkedIn Learning launched in FY23, and the Group 
believes this solution is critical to both enabling our colleagues to improve their ways of working as  
well as to develop wider skills for the future. 
The physical, emotional and financial well-being of colleagues continued to be a key focus for the 
Group in FY24 and we expect this to continue into FY25. We have developed and enhanced our 
well-being strategy, maintaining multiple areas of support for colleagues, including access to an EAP 
scheme, mental health support, access to health schemes and discounts, shopping discounts and 
support and an ongoing programme of webinars across a variety of subjects. 
We have continued to invest in the future of the business and ensure we support young people  
into work through additional apprenticeship programmes, there are currently eighteen apprentices  
in the Group. 
In addition, we have seen a further increase in the volunteering days taken by our colleagues over  
the last 12 months as we continue with our commitment to giving back to our communities. 
As outlined on page 37, the Group has continued with its SAYE scheme, giving colleagues the 
opportunity to become personally invested in the Company. In FY24, the Company granted options 
over a total of 352,068 ordinary shares under this scheme.
CUSTOMERS
The Group’s extensive customer services, which are detailed on the Group’s website at  
https://www.redcentricplc.com/services/, are core to the Group’s customer proposition and the 
Group is in regular dialogue with its existing and potential customers in order that it may understand 
and respond to their ongoing and future requirements. The Group also keeps abreast of customer 
needs and communicates its proposition to customers through regular customer surveys, monthly and 
quarterly service reviews and through its social media channels. In FY24 the Group introduced monthly 
customer newsletters to keep customers abreast of new services from the Group, general industry 
trends and to update on other areas of interest. 
The Board also considers its shareholders, suppliers and the environment to be key stakeholders  
and details of how the Group fosters relationships with these stakeholders and considers their needs 
are set out in the Section 172 statement on page 28-30 of this Report. 
Corporate Governance (continued)
Governance 
Principle
Application
Principle 4 
Embed effective 
risk management, 
considering both 
opportunities and 
threats, throughout 
the organisation
As set out in the Audit Committee Report on page 62, the Board is committed to ensuring that risk 
management forms part of the way the Group works and is embedded in the business, coordinated by 
the Chief Financial Officer, and with reporting on mitigating actions as well as the risks. 
The key risks and challenges facing the Group and the high-level management of such are outlined on 
pages 32-33. The Group continues to operate a tiered hierarchy for risk management, with functional 
management of direct risks and consistent measures across all functions, and escalation of significant 
value risks, along with principal corporate risks, to the Group’s corporate risk register. The corporate 
risk register is shared and refined with the Audit Committee and Board at key intervals in the year, 
coordinated by the Chief Financial Officer and with reporting on mitigating actions for each risk.
There continues to be close focus on emerging climate change related risks with the TCFD 
recommendations being integrated into the Group’s risk management framework. These risks are 
managed by the Group’s Sustainability Committee, which provides regular reports to the Board.
The Board has overall responsibility for the Group’s system of internal control and for reviewing its 
effectiveness. The implementation and maintenance of the risk management and internal control 
systems are the responsibility of the Operating Board. However, the internal control system is designed 
to manage rather than eliminate risk and can therefore only provide reasonable and not absolute 
assurance against material misstatement or loss. The Board considers that the internal controls in 
place are appropriate for the size, complexity and risk profile of the Group. Enhancements continue to 
be made to D365, the Group’s ERP system, overseen by the Group’s Chief Technology Officer, which 
shall further strengthen the control environment. Work has continued throughout the year to improve 
the control environment, both through the integration of the acquisitions completed in FY23 and 
continuous development and implementation of plans to address risks and control weaknesses. The 
principal elements of the Group’s internal control system cover financial, operational and compliance 
controls and include:
1.	
close management of the day-to-day activities of the Group by the Executive Directors;
2.	
an established budgetary system with the preparation and approval of an annual budget  
by the Board and regular monitoring and review of performance against budget, forecasts  
and prior year;
3.	
detailed monthly reporting to the Board, both at Group and at divisional level (including 
financial information, performance against budget and key performance and risk indicators) 
whereby the Executive Directors report on significant changes to the business and external 
marketplace to the extent they represent significant risk;
4.	
an organisational structure that has clear reporting lines and delegated authorities,  
and which aligns with the divisional structure implemented at the start of FY23;
5.	
management and monitoring of risk and performance at multiple levels throughout  
the Group; and
6.	
continually improving finance, legal and assurance and compliance functions that maintain 
processes and systems to enhance the control environment, including the control of 
expenditure, authorisation limits, purchase ordering, sales order intake, contract review  
and approval.
The Group also works hard to maintain a number of ISO accreditations it has achieved over a number 
of years, detailed at https://www.redcentricplc.com/about-us/accreditations-frameworks/, and has 
a number of policies and procedures in place in order to fulfil the requirements of and maintain 
these accreditations.
54
55
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Governance
Governance

Corporate Governance (continued)
Governance 
Principle
Application
Principle 5 
Maintain the 
Board as a well-
functioning, 
balanced team led 
by the chair
The composition of the Board is detailed on page 60-61. 
The Board delegates specific responsibilities to the Board committees. The composition of the 
committees and how they discharge their responsibilities can be found on page 60-61.
Part of the role of the Board’s Nomination Committee, chaired by Nick Bate, is to keep the composition 
of the Board under review as the Group’s business evolves. Following Helena Feltham’s resignation 
part way through FY24, the Company commenced a recruitment process for a new Non-Executive 
Director and chair of the Remuneration Committee, which was led by Nick Bate, and culminated in 
Michelle Senecal De Fonseca joining the Board as Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Company’s 
Remuneration Committee. Michelle brought with her considerable knowledge of the technology, 
telecoms, and cloud industries, as well as significant expertise in company remuneration policies  
and processes. The appointment of Oliver Scott as a Non-Executive Director (non-independent)  
during the year also further enhances the Group’s knowledge of the technology investment space  
and public markets. 
The Board is satisfied that it has an appropriate balance between independence and knowledge of 
the Group to enable it to discharge its duties and responsibilities effectively and has the appropriate 
frameworks in place to ensure that this is the case. All Directors are encouraged and expected to use 
their independent judgement and to challenge matters where required, both strategic and operational. 
Whilst Oliver Scott is not considered independent as a result of being a partner of Kestrel, one of 
Redcentric’s largest shareholders, the Board is satisfied that it has a suitable Board composition and 
governing principals to ensure appropriate levels of independence.
The Executive Directors of the Company are employed on a full-time basis. Non-Executive Directors 
are required to devote such time to the Group’s affairs as necessary to discharge their duties and 
this may change from time to time. In addition to scheduled Board meetings, members are required 
to attend other ad hoc Board meetings, committee meetings, the AGM and any other business or 
general meetings as required. Board members are also required to consider all relevant papers before 
each meeting and to devote additional time in respect of preparation and ad hoc matters which 
may arise. Non-Executive Directors are required to obtain the agreement of the Chairman before 
accepting additional commitments that may affect the time that they are able to devote to their role as 
a Non-Executive Director. Further details of external appointments of the Board are included in their 
biographies on page 60-61. 
Details of the number of regular scheduled meetings of the Board and committees, together with the 
attendance record for each Board member, are set out on page 59. 
The Board recently concluded an assessment of its performance, and more detail is provided below 
against Principle 7.
Corporate Governance (continued)
Governance 
Principle
Application
Principle 6 
Ensure that 
between them the 
Directors have the 
necessary up-to-
date experience, 
skills and 
capabilities
Directors’ details and biographies are on page 60-61. The Board considers that, with the appointment 
of two new Non-Executive Directors during FY24, it has further developed its skills and experience, 
enabling it to execute its duties and responsibilities effectively and appropriately given the nature and 
size of the Group. Directors are responsible for ensuring their continuing professional development to 
maintain their effective skills and knowledge. 
As part of the Board performance assessment concluded in FY23, details of which are set out below, 
each Board member provided information on their individual skills and experience in areas relevant to 
the Group. This exercise indicated a high level of capability in most areas. 
The Board receives monthly reports on the Group’s operational and financial performance as 
mentioned above, and formal agendas and reports are also circulated to the Board in advance 
of meetings. The Board has access to the advice and services of the Company Secretary, who is 
responsible for ensuring that Board procedures are followed, and applicable rules and regulations are 
adhered to. Directors are able to obtain further advice or seek clarity on issues raised in reports or at 
meetings from within the Group or from external sources. The Board also has a procedure whereby any 
Director may seek, through the Company Secretary, independent professional advice in furtherance of 
their duties, if necessary, at the Group’s expense. Alan Aubrey was the Company’s Senior Independent 
Director during FY24 and provided a sounding board for the Chairman and also served as an 
intermediary for the other Directors where required. 
External advisers or consultants have been engaged by the Board in respect of its remuneration 
policies and in relation to the appointment of Michelle Senecal De Fonseca to the Board. 
On appointment to the Board, new Directors receive a tailored induction pack and introductions to 
relevant personnel within the Group. 
Principle 7 
Evaluate Board 
performance 
based on clear and 
relevant objectives, 
seeking continuous 
improvement
The Board last carried out its periodic evaluation in FY23. This assessment was internally facilitated and 
comprised the following elements:
	-
a questionnaire completed by every Board member covering Board and Committee structure, 
processes, agendas and priorities. Each Board member’s assessment of their individual performance 
and feedback on each other was also sought. The questionnaire was based on ones designed by 
external consultants with considerable experience of Board reviews, but tailored to meet the specific 
circumstances of the Group; 
	-
completion of a skills matrix by each Board member, as referred to under Principle 6 above, to 
identify areas of expertise on the Board and additional areas that the Board could consider in 
relation to future appointments; 
	-
review by the Board of the consolidated outputs of the questionnaire and skills matrix, facilitated by 
the Company Secretary and Chairman. 
In addition to the appointment of a new a new Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee, the processes identified a number of other actions which the Board believes will assist in 
improving Board performance and these will be implemented during the year, including: 
	-
timings of Board reports prior to meetings;
	-
ongoing review of Board composition;
	-
ongoing review and update of the Company’s investor relations and communications policy;
	-
review of the Group’s ESG strategy and priorities;
	-
ongoing review of succession planning.
The next evaluation will be completed during the course of FY25.
56
57
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Governance
Governance

Corporate Governance (continued)
Governance 
Principle
Application
Principle 8 
Promote a 
corporate culture 
that is based on 
ethical values and 
behaviours
The Board aims to lead by example with respect to promoting a healthy corporate culture and ensuring 
that ethical values and behaviours are embedded in the business. The processes in place for decision 
making, which are documented in its Committee terms of reference, the Company’s share dealing code 
and the requirement for ongoing disclosure of interests, are all examples of processes which require 
high standards of behaviour from the Board. 
Employment policies adopted by the Group assist in embedding a culture of ethical behaviour and 
the values set out in its corporate social responsibility statement. Ongoing training on the Group’s 
compliance and anti-bribery policy and the Group’s Modern Slavery Act policy continue to reinforce the 
culture of ethical values and behaviours.
The Group is pleased that in FY24 there has been an increase in charitable activity across the Group, 
with a number of volunteering challenges and fundraising events. This activity includes maintenance of 
the Trees For Life partnership, a partnership with Generation (which supports underprivileged young 
adults into the workplace), the Mission Christmas volunteering campaign, Easter Egg appeal and 
charity walks. Several local and national charities have been supported through the year by colleague 
fundraising, including Macmillan Cancer Support and The Children’s Heart Surgery Fund.
All colleagues are granted a day’s paid volunteering, and the Group encourages colleagues to use this 
day to take part in local volunteering activity. We are delighted that FY24 has continued to see a strong 
take up of the Company volunteering day as our colleagues support their chosen causes. 
Further details of the Group’s charitable activity is set out on page 37. 
Principle 9 
Maintain 
governance 
structures and 
processes that 
are fit for purpose 
and support good 
decision-making by 
the Board
The business and management of the Group are the collective responsibility of the Board. The Board 
meets at least eleven times a year at various Company locations in accordance with its scheduled 
meeting calendar and this schedule is supplemented with additional meetings as and when required 
and monthly Board reports circulated in respect of the previous month. The annual calendar includes 
presentations from all members of the Operating Board through the course of the year. The attendance 
by each Board member at meetings held in the year is shown in the table below. 
At each scheduled meeting, the Board considers and reviews the trading performance of the Group for 
the previous month together with additional topics based on the annual Board calendar. The Board and 
its Committees receive appropriate and timely information prior to each meeting in accordance with a 
reporting timetable agreed with the Board and Operating Board. A formal agenda is agreed with the 
Chair for each meeting and papers are distributed several days ahead of meetings taking place. 
The Board has a formal written schedule of matters reserved for its review and approval including 
approval of the annual budget, major capital expenditure and interim and annual results. All specific 
actions arising are documented following each Board and Committee meeting, followed up by the 
Executive Directors and Company Secretary and then reviewed at the next meeting. 
BOARD COMMITTEES
The Board is supported by the Audit, Nomination and Remuneration Committees. A report on 
the composition, responsibilities and key activities of the Audit Committee are set out in the Audit 
Committee Report and in the Directors’ Remuneration Report for the Remuneration Committee. 
The Nomination Committee consists of Nick Bate (Chair), Alan Aubrey, Oliver Scott and Michelle 
Senecal De Fonseca (both of whom joined during the year). The Committee meets at least once a year 
and further as required, particularly as and when necessary to identify and nominate for approval by 
the Board, candidates for Board appointments. The Committee engages external consultants when 
appropriate to assist in the search for and selection of new Board members. During the year, the 
Nomination Committee was involved in the appointment of Michelle Senecal De Fonseca as Non-
Executive Director and Chair of the Remuneration Committee. 
The Committee has terms of reference in place which have been formally approved by the Board and 
once a year it reviews the structure, size and composition (including diversity) of the Board, considers 
succession planning and reviews the leadership needs of the organisation. 
Corporate Governance (continued)
Governance 
Principle
Application
Principle 9 cont 
Maintain 
governance 
structures and 
processes that 
are fit for purpose 
and support good 
decision-making by 
the Board
OPERATING BOARD
Authority for execution of approved policies, business plan and daily running of the business is 
delegated to the Executive Directors together with the Operating Board, which manages and 
monitors operational performance across the business and ensures effective decision-making. The 
Operating Board meets on a weekly basis and provides written reports to the Executive Directors on 
a monthly basis shortly before each Board meeting to ensure that the Board has the most up to date 
information possible. 
Principle 10 
Communicate 
how the company 
is governed and 
is performing 
by maintaining 
a dialogue with 
shareholders and 
other relevant 
stakeholders
The Board communicates with its shareholders in a range of ways including through the Annual Report 
and Accounts, interim and full-year results announcements, further trading updates where required and 
appropriate, the AGM, investor roadshows and one-to-one meetings with major existing shareholders 
or potential new shareholders. The Group’s website (www.redcentricplc.com), particularly the investor 
section of the site, also provides a range of corporate information for shareholders, investors and the 
public, including all Company announcements and presentations. 
Group performance information is communicated to colleagues, within the limitations imposed by the 
Company’s public company disclosure obligations, in a number of ways, including regular colleague-
wide email communications from the Executive Directors and Operating Board and monthly colleague 
briefing sessions. The Company also ran its latest colleague survey in FY24, the results and proposed 
outputs of which were reported to colleagues through the all colleague briefing sessions. 
Further details of how the Company maintains a dialogue with customers and suppliers, both being key 
stakeholders, are set out in the section 172 statement at pages 28-30 of this Report. 
Board of Directors 
The following table details the attendance of the Board members at regular scheduled Board and Committee meetings held 
during FY24 which they were eligible to attend.
Name
Position 
(at 31 
March 
2024)
Main Board
Audit Committee
Remuneration 
Committee
Nomination 
Committee
Total
Attended
Total
Attended
Total
Attended
Total
Attended
Nick Bate
Chair
13
13
2
2
5
5
2
2
Alan Aubrey 
NED
13
13
2
2
5
5
2
2
Helena Feltham 
(Resigned 24 
July 2023)
NED
4
4
-
-
4
4
2
2
Oliver Scott 
(Appointed 1 
December 2023)
NED
4
4
-
-
-
-
-
-
Michelle Senecal 
De Fonseca 
(Appointed 13 
February 2024)
NED
2
2
-
-
-
-
-
-
Peter Brotherton
CEO
13
13
-
-
-
-
-
-
David Senior
CFO
13
13
-
-
-
-
-
-
58
59
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Governance
Governance

Corporate Governance (continued)
Nick Bate, Independent Non-Executive Chairman of the Board
Appointment date: 17 November 2021
Committee membership: Chair of the Nomination Committee, member of 
the Remuneration Committee and interim member of the Audit Committee 
Experience and external appointments: Nick is an experienced chairman 
and Non-Executive Director of a portfolio of companies across the data, 
communications, software and financial services sectors, and most 
recently sat on the board of Directors for Nasstar plc for over six years. 
Nick has a proven track record in delivering successful growth through the 
application of his financial, commercial and operational skills and strong 
experience in corporate M&A transactions. Nick is a chartered 
management accountant. 
Alan Aubrey, Independent Non-Executive Director (and Senior 
Independent Director)
Appointment date: 21 July 2022
Committee membership: Chair of the Audit Committee, interim Chair of 
the Remuneration Committee and a member of the Nomination Committee
Experience and external appointments: Alan is an experienced executive 
and Non-Executive Director, having been CEO of IP Group plc from 2006 to 
2021 and having served as Non-Executive Chair of Ceres Power Holdings plc 
and Proactis Holdings plc and Non-Executive Director of Avacta Group plc. 
Alan currently serves as Non-Executive Chair of DeepMatter Group plc and 
OxCCU Limited, and on the board of Trellix Limited and Rio AI Limited. Alan 
has also formerly served on the boards of several large private companies, 
including Oxford Nanopore and Oxford Sciences Innovation plc, and served as 
a Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Audit Committee of the Department 
of Business, Innovation, University and Skills (‘DIUS’, now the Department of 
Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy, ‘BEIS’) of the UK government.
Oliver Scott, Non-Executive Director (non-independent)
Appointment date: 1 December 2023
Committee membership: Member of the Audit, Remuneration and 
Nomination Committees
Experience and external appointments: Oliver is a partner of Kestrel, the 
independent investment manager, which Oliver co-founded in 2009. Kestrel 
is Redcentric’s largest shareholder. Prior to Oliver’s co-founding of Kestrel, 
Oliver spent 20 years advising smaller quoted and unquoted companies, 
latterly as a Director of KBC Peel Hunt Corporate Finance. Oliver is currently 
a Non-Executive Director of Smoove PLC and K3 Business Technology PLC, 
and was previously a Non-Executive Director of Idox PLC, IQGeo Group PLC 
and KBC Advanced Technology PLC. 
Non-Executive Directors
Corporate Governance (continued)
Non-Executive Directors (continued)
Michelle Senecal De Fonseca, Independent Non-Executive Director 
Appointment date: 13 February 2024
Committee membership: Chair of the Remuneration Committee and 
a member of the Audit and Nomination Committees
Experience and external appointments: Michelle is an experienced 
executive and Non-Executive Director in the technology industry, having 
been managing Director for Vodafone’s cloud and hosting services 
business, and serving as area vice president for sales and services for 
Northern Europe at Citrix before becoming its global vice president for 
strategic alliances. Michelle also currently serves as a Non-Executive 
Director on the boards of FDM Group, Alphawave IP Group PLC, ASU 
Global Foundation UK Limited and Women in Telecom & Technology. 
Executive Directors
Peter Brotherton, Chief Executive Officer
Appointment date: 28 November 2016. Peter served as Chief Financial 
Officer of the Company from 28 November 2016 to 21 November 2018 and 
then as interim Chief Executive Officer from 22 November 2018 to 28 May 
2019, when he was appointed as Chief Executive Officer. 
Experience and external appointments: Peter has over 25 years’ 
experience across a number of senior finance roles. Peter’s two previous 
roles were as Chief Financial Officer of Gametech and Chief Financial Officer 
at PKR Group. Prior to those two roles, from 2011 to 2014, Peter was Chief 
Financial Officer and then Chief Executive Officer of Meucci Solutions NV. 
Meucci Solutions was an international telecommunications and Managed 
Services business. During his time at Meucci Solutions, the business saw 
strong sales and EBITDA growth whilst also extensively reviewing its 
central financial control function. Peter also had senior finance roles at Varla 
(UK) Limited, Cell Structures Group plc and spent five years at Kingston 
Communications plc, becoming Director of Finance. Peter qualified as an 
ACA chartered accountant at KPMG. Peter holds no external appointments. 
David Senior, Chief Financial Officer
Appointment date: 3 April 2020 
Experience and external appointments: David served in the role of 
Finance Director of the Group since 2017, prior to his appointment as  
Chief Financial Officer. David is a chartered certified accountant with  
20 years of experience in finance, including in several senior positions  
with Wolseley plc. 
60
61
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Governance
Governance

Governance 
At the beginning of the year the Audit Committee was 
chaired by Alan Aubrey and also contained Helena Feltham. 
Nick Bate replaced Helena Feltham on the Committee on  
an interim basis on 18 July 2023 in advance of her 
resignation from the Board on 24 July 2023. Following his 
appointment to the Board, Oliver Scott was appointed to 
the Audit Committee from 1 December 2023. In addition, 
following her appointment to the Board, Michelle Senecal 
de Fonseca was also appointed to the Audit Committee 
from 13 February 2024. 
The Committee meets at least twice a year at appropriate 
intervals in the financial reporting and audit cycle, and 
at other times during the year as agreed between the 
members of the Committee or as required. The Executive 
Directors are not members of the Committee but attend 
Committee meetings by invitation, as necessary, to facilitate 
its business. The Committee also meets the external auditor 
at least once a year without management present, to discuss 
their remit and any issues arising from the previous audit.
During the year, the Committee met twice. Attendance 
details for the regular scheduled meetings are provided  
on page 59.
Key responsibilities 
The Committee’s terms of reference are available on the 
Investor section of the Group’s website. In accordance with 
the terms, the Committee’s responsibilities include:
•	
monitoring the integrity of the Financial Statements of 
the Group, including all formal announcements relating 
to financial performance;
•	
reviewing and reporting to the Board on significant 
financial reporting issues and judgements contained in 
any announcements of financial performance;
•	
reviewing the effectiveness of internal financial controls 
and internal control and risk management systems and 
the need for an internal audit function;
•	
reviewing the adequacy of arrangements for the raising 
of concerns about possible wrongdoing, procedures 
for detecting fraud and systems and controls for the 
prevention of bribery;
•	
the recommendation of, appointment, re-appointment, 
and removal of the external Auditor;
•	
reviewing the scope and results of the external annual 
audit by the Auditor, their effectiveness, independence 
and objectivity; 
•	
reviewing the nature and extent of any non-audit 
services provided by the external Auditor.
The Committee reports on all such matters to the Board. 
Internal control and risk management 
The Audit Committee supports the Board in reviewing 
the risk management methodology and the effectiveness 
of internal control. The Audit Committee acknowledges 
that there is a requirement for continuous improvement to 
the control environment particularly following acquisitions 
completed by the Group in last few years and as such, 
as part of integration of acquired businesses, there are 
ongoing plans to address risk and control weaknesses 
identified. The Group continues to operate a tiered 
hierarchy for risk management, with functional management 
of direct risks and consistent measures across all functions, 
and escalation of significant value risks, along with principal 
corporate risks, to the Group’s corporate risk register. 
The corporate risk register is shared and refined with 
the Audit Committee and Board at key intervals in the 
year, coordinated by the Chief Financial Officer and with 
reporting on mitigating actions for each risk.
In FY24, having identified climate change as a principal 
risk for the first time in FY22 and developed an initial 
assessment of this risk in FY23, there has been a continued 
focus on emerging climate change related risks with the 
TCFD recommendations being integrated into the Group’s 
risk management framework. These risks are managed by 
the Group’s Sustainability Committee, initially formed in 
FY23, which provides quarterly reports to the Board.
External audit 
The Audit Committee approved the appointment and 
remuneration of the external auditor and the Chief Financial 
Officer monitors the level and nature of non-audit services, 
and specific assignments are flagged for approval by the 
Audit Committee as appropriate. The Audit Committee 
reviews non-audit fees and considers implications for the 
objectivity and independence of the relationship with the 
external Auditor. The Committee maintains regular dialogue 
with the external auditor on ways to improve the efficiency 
and effectiveness of the external audit process. 
Audit Committee Report 
External audit (continued) 
The responsibilities of the Board and external auditor in 
connection with the Group’s Financial Statements are set 
out in the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities and 
Auditor’s Report respectively and details of the services 
provided by and fees payable to the auditor are included in 
Note 8 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
KPMG LLP were appointed as the Group’s Auditor on 15 
May 2017. This is the third year that Christopher Vaulks has 
been the engagement leader. 
Financial reporting
The Committee reviewed the full year results including 
the annual report and accounts, the preliminary results 
announcement and the report from the external auditor. 
In reviewing the statements and determining whether they 
were fair, balanced and understandable, the committee 
considered the work and recommendations of management 
as well as the report from the external auditor. 
The Committee considered the appropriateness of 
accounting policies, including critical accounting 
judgements. To do this, the Committee reviewed the 
information provided by management and the views from 
the external auditors on the accounting treatments and 
judgements in the FY24 Financial Statements. 
In the prior financial year there were significant reporting 
issues and judgements involving estimation uncertainty 
to be considered by the Committee primarily stemming 
from the Group’s acquisitions made in FY23; Sungard 
Data Centres, Sungard Consulting and 4D Data Centres, 
including accounting for the two Sungard acquisitions 
as a single transaction and estimating the fair value of 
consideration transferred and the fair value of the intangible 
assets and property, plant and equipment acquired of those 
same business combinations.
In preparing the FY24 Financial Statements the key 
judgements that could have a material effect on the 
amounts recognised in these Financial Statements relate 
to going concern and presentation of exceptional items. 
Both are addressed below. 
Going concern
The Committee have reviewed the reports and financial 
models from management on the going concern 
assumptions when considering the FY24 results and the 
Group’s financial performance and compliance with banking 
covenants for a period of at least 12 months from the date 
of approval of the Financial Statements. The Committee 
notes the extension of the Group’s banking facilities by one 
year to April 2026, agreed with the lending parties in March 
2024, as well as the agreed revision of certain measures 
within the banking covenants at June and September 2024 
agreed in June 2024.
Internal financial projections and the results of stress testing 
the financial models were reviewed, with management 
applying severe but plausible downside scenarios (see Note 
1.1 for further details). The Committee have assessed the 
factors considered both in the base cost financial models 
and in the severe but plausible downside scenarios and 
deemed them appropriate in the context of the current 
trading environment. The committee notes that the primary 
factor in the going concern assessment continues to be 
compliance with the banking covenants.
The Committee concluded that these Financial Statements 
are appropriate to be prepared on a going concern basis 
and are satisfied with the detail and transparency of the 
basis of preparation disclosure and the judgement involved 
in determining that there is no material uncertainty.
Exceptional items
The Committee have reviewed management’s analysis of 
exceptional items and the presentation of those within 
these Financial Statements in the context of the Group’s 
accounting policy, as well as in the context of the definition 
of exceptional items for the purposes of the banking 
facility agreement. The committee is satisfied that the 
costs presented as exceptional items within these Financial 
Statements are appropriate under all definitions.
Alan Aubrey
Chair of the Audit Committee
15 August 2024
Audit Committee Report (continued)
63
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Governance
Governance
62

Introduction 
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present the Directors’ Remuneration Report for the year ended 31 March 2024, my 
first as Chair of the Remuneration Committee. As the Company is listed on the Alternative Investment Market (“AIM”), we are 
required to comply with AIM Rule 19 in respect of remuneration disclosures. However, we also provide additional voluntary 
disclosures in line with AIM best practice, to enable shareholders to better understand and consider our remuneration 
arrangements. This report is divided into three sections being:
•	
The Annual Statement, which summarises the Committee and its work. 
•	
The Directors’ Remuneration Policy, which summarises the Company’s Remuneration Policy; and
•	
The Annual Report on Remuneration, which discloses how the Remuneration Policy was implemented in FY24 in detail 
and how the Policy will operate for FY25.
As a Committee, we recognise the need to foster good relations with our shareholders and encourage open dialogue.  
As such, I am available for discussion with institutional investors concerning the Company’s approach to remuneration 
at any time. We trust you will find this Report to be informative and look forward to receiving your support at our 
forthcoming AGM. 
Michelle Senecal de Fonseca
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
15 August 2024
Annual Statement
Committee members
At the beginning of the year the Remuneration Committee was chaired by Helena Feltham as independent Non-Executive 
Director. Alan Aubrey was appointed interim chair of the Remuneration Committee from 18 July 2023 (following Helena’s 
resignation from the Board) to 13 February 2024 (following the appointment of Michelle Senecal de Fonseca to the Board 
as independent Non-Executive Director and chair of the Remuneration Committee). The Committee meets at least twice a 
year and at other times during the year as agreed between the members of the Committee. The attendance record for the 
meetings held in the year is included on page 59.
Committee responsibilities
The Group is committed to maximising shareholder value over time. Each year the Remuneration Committee reviews 
the incentive and reward packages for the Chairman, Executive Directors and senior executives to ensure that they are 
aligned with the Group’s strategic objectives and financial performance, and are appropriate to attract, retain and motivate 
management behaviour in support of the Company’s culture and beliefs and the creation of shareholder value. The 
Committee has formal terms of reference which can be found in the investor section of the Group’s website. The Board 
(excluding the Non-Executive Directors) sets the annual base fees payable to the Non-Executive Directors and they do not 
receive any additional benefits, nor are they eligible to participate in any pension or incentive arrangements.
Advisors to the Committee
FIT Remuneration Consultants LLP continues to provide independent advice to the Remuneration Committee in respect of 
remuneration quantum and structure and developments in governance and best practice more generally. FIT is a member 
and signatory of the Remuneration Consultants Group and voluntarily operates under the Code of Conduct in relation to 
executive remuneration consulting in the UK, details of which can be found at www.remunerationconsultantsgroup.com.
Directors’ Remuneration Report – Annual Statement 
64
65
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Governance
We value the continuity of our 
relationship with Redcentric. 
We know we can trust the 
team at Redcentric and that 
they will do the right thing 
for Heathrow.
“
”
64

Directors’ Remuneration Policy 
This section sets out the Directors’ Remuneration Policy (“Policy”). In order to deliver the Group’s strategy, the primary 
objectives of our Policy are:
•	
to operate a transparent, simple and effective remuneration structure which encourages the delivery of Group targets 
in accordance with our business plan and strategy;
•	
to attract, motivate and retain the best people of the highest calibre by providing competitive and appropriate short- 
and long-term variable pay which is dependent upon challenging performance conditions; and
•	
to promote the Company’s culture and beliefs and promote the long-term success of the Group and ensure that our 
policy is aligned with the interests of, and feedback from, our shareholders.
Summary of Directors’ Remuneration Policy 
Component
Purpose and link to 
strategy
Operation
Maximum
Performance
Base salary
To provide a competitive 
base salary to attract, 
motivate and retain 
Directors with the experi-
ence and capabilities to 
achieve the strategic aims.
Reviewed annually after considering pay 
levels at comparably sized listed companies 
and sector peers, the performance, role 
and responsibility of each Director, market 
conditions, the Company’s performance and 
the level of pay across the Group as a whole.
n/a 
n/a
Benefits
To provide market-
competitive benefits 
package.
Life assurance cover of four times salary, 
private medical insurance for themselves, their 
spouse and their children.
n/a
n/a
Pension
To provide an appropriate 
level of retirement benefit.
Workforce aligned pension which may be paid 
as a pension and/or cash allowance if annual 
or lifetime limits are met.
Currently 
5% of 
salary
n/a
Annual 
bonus
To reward performance 
against annual targets 
which support the strategic 
direction of Group.
Cash bonus of up to 60% based on financial 
and strategic targets and a share bonus of up 
to 40% also based on financial and strategic 
targets, paid in the event of exceptional 
performance against targets.
100% of 
salary
Sliding scale 
financial and 
strategic 
targets 
Performance 
-related  
bonus
To drive and reward the 
achievement of longer-
term objectives and 
align management with 
shareholders.
Special bonus scheme which will pay out in 
the event of a change of control, subject to the 
discretion of the Remuneration Committee.
n/a
Metrics will 
be linked to 
financial and/
or share price 
and/or strategic 
performance
LTIP
To drive and reward the 
achievement of longer-
term objectives and 
align management with 
shareholders.
Conditional shares and/or nil cost or nominal 
cost share options. Vesting is normally 
subject to the achievement of challenging 
performance conditions, normally over a 
period of three years. Dividend equivalents 
may be awarded to the extent awards vest. 
Awards may be subject to malus/clawback 
provisions at the discretion of the Committee.
200% of 
salary
Metrics will 
be linked 
to financial 
and/or share 
price and/
or strategic 
performance
All-employee 
share awards
To align management 
with employees and 
shareholders.
Awards will be consistent with prevailing 
HMRC tax favoured all-employee share plans.
Prevailing 
HMRC 
limits
n/a
Non-
Executive 
Directors
The Committee determines 
the Chairman’s fee. Fees for 
the Non-Executive Directors 
are agreed by the Chairman 
and Chief Executive. 
Fees are reviewed annually taking into 
account the level of responsibility and relevant 
experience. Fees may include a basic fee and 
additional fees for further responsibilities. Fees 
are normally paid in cash. Travel and other 
reasonable expenses incurred in the course of 
performing their duties may be reimbursed.
n/a
n/a
Directors’ Remuneration Report – Annual Statement 
(continued)
Service contracts 
The details of the Executive and Non-Executive Directors’ service contracts and appointment letters are summarised below:
Date of appointment
Contractual 
notice 
period 
(months)
Length of service 
contract at 
31 March 2024
Executive Directors
Peter Brotherton 
David Senior
28 November 2016 
3 April 2020
6 
6
7 years 4 months 
3 years 11 months
Non-Executive Directors
Nick Bate 
Alan Aubrey 
Oliver Scott 
Michelle Senecal de Fonseca
17 November 2021 
21 July 2022 
1 December 2023 
13 February 2024
3 
3 
3 
3
2 year 4 months 
1 year 8 months 
4 months 
1 month
The service contracts and letters of appointment continue in force until notice in writing is given by either the Company or 
the Director.
Implementation of the Remuneration Policy for the year ended 31 March 2024
•	
The salaries for the CEO and CFO were increased to £383,993 and £220,000 respectively from the 1 July 2023;
•	
Executive Directors received a workforce aligned pension at 5% of salary;
•	
Following an assessment of personal performance against strategic targets and also performance against the Group’s 
overall strategic and integration objectives, the CEO and CFO received cash annual bonus awards of 30% and 34.5% of 
salary respectively post year end.
•	
Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) awards were granted to the CEO and CFO in September 2023 over shares with a 
value equal to 200% of salary with the first 100% of salary based on absolute Total Shareholder Return (“TSR”) between 
5% and 10% p.a. and the additional 100% of salary based on stretch absolute TSR targets of 10% to 15% p.a.
Implementation of the Remuneration Policy for the year ending 31 March 2025
•	
The CEO will receive a revised salary of £384,000 and the CFO will receive a revised salary of £235,000, both with effect 
from 01 July 2024;
•	
Pension provision will continue at 5% of salary in line with the workforce provision;
•	
Annual cash bonus potential will continue to be capped at 50% of salary for FY24. 60% of the bonus will be payable 
against financial targets and 40% will be based on strategic targets. A share bonus of up to 50% of salary will be 
payable in the event of exceptional performance against financial and strategic targets; and
•	
2024 LTIP awards will be granted to Executive Directors in line with the annual grant policy over shares with a value 
equal to 200% of salary with the first 100% of the award based 50% on Total Shareholder Return (“TSR”) between 5% 
and 10% p.a. and 50% on an adjusted EPS achieved within range of 5.0p and 7.0p the second 100% based 50% on 
stretch absolute TSR targets of 10% to 15% p.a. and 50% on an adjusted EPS of 9.0p or greater. Details of the awards 
will be set out in the RNS issued immediately following the grant date.
Directors’ Remuneration Report – Annual Statement 
(continued)
66
67
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Governance
Governance

Annual Report on Remuneration
Single total figure of remuneration for Directors 
The remuneration of the Directors in respect of FY24, with prior year comparatives, was as follows:
Year
Base Salary 
/ Fees
Annual Bonus
Pension
Share-
based 
payments
Total
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
Executive
Peter Brotherton
FY24
382
114
43
- 
539
FY23
368
54
16
393 2
831
David Senior
FY24
215
74
11
- 
300
FY23
200
24
11
104 3
339
Non-Executive Directors
Nick Bate
FY24
85
-
-
-
85
FY23
85
-
-
-
85
Alan Aubrey
FY24
50
-
-
-
50
FY23
38
-
-
-
38
Oliver Scott 
FY24
8
-
-
-
8
(appointed 1 December 2023)
FY23
-
-
-
-
-
Michelle Senecal de Fonseca 
FY24
7
-
-
-
7
(appointed 13 February 2024)
FY23
-
-
-
-
-
Former Directors
Helena Feltham
FY24
16
-
-
-
16
(resigned 24 July 2023)
FY23
50
-
-
-
50
Jon Kempster 
FY24
-
-
-
-
-
(resigned 21 July 2022)
FY23
25
-
-
-
25
Total
FY24
789
188
54
-
1,031
FY23
741
78
27
497
1,343
1.	
The annual bonus plan for FY24 was based on sliding scale Group adjusted EBITDA (40%), Group Net Debt (20%) and Strategic targets (40%). 
Following an assessment of personal performance against strategic targets and also performance against the Group’s overall strategic and 
integration objectives, the CEO and CFO received cash annual bonus awards of 30% and 34.5% of salary respectively. As the awards are below 
the 50% of salary deferral threshold, the bonus awards were paid in cash.
2.	
On 14 September 2022, Peter Brotherton exercised options over 379,267 ordinary shares of 0.1p each at a price of 103.5 pence per ordinary 
share resulting in a pre-tax gain of £392,541.
3.	
On 14 September 2022, David Senior exercised options over 100,000 ordinary shares of 0.1p each at a price of 103.5 pence per ordinary share 
resulting in a pre-tax gain of £103,500.
Directors’ Remuneration Report – Annual Statement 
(continued)
Executive Director’s share awards in the Company 
Details of share options in the Company held by the Directors during the year are as follows:
Exercise 
price (p)
Balance, 
31 March 2023 
(number)
Granted 
(number)
Cancelled 
/ lapsed 
(number)
Balance, 
31 March 2024 
(number)
Peter Brotherton
(a)
0.1
242,915
-
(242,915)
-
(b)
0.1
554,326
-
-
554,326
(c)
99.9
18,023
-
-
18,023
(e)
0.1
621,250
-
-
621,250
(f)
0.1
-
605,620
-
605,620
1,436,514
605,620
(242,915)
1,799,219
David Senior
(a)
0.1
129,555
-
(129,555)
-
(b)
0.1
312,296
-
-
312,296
(d)
96.1
18,736
-
-
18,736
(e)
0.1
333,334
-
-
333,334
(f) 
0.1
-
347,030 
-
347,030
793,921
347,030 
(129,555)
1,011,396
(a) Granted on 8 December 2020 under the Company’s Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”). These options failed to vest following the publication 
of the Company’s results for the year ended 31 March 2023 due to the vesting condition over Company share price growth not being met.
(b) Granted on 18 November 2021 under the Company’s LTIP. The options will vest three years from grant subject to absolute Total Shareholder 
Return (TSR) Targets. For awards up to 100% of salary, 25% will vest for TSR of 5% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 10% p.a. 
For awards between 100% and 200% of salary, 0% will vest for TSR of 10% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 15% p.a.
(c) Granted on 23 December 2021 under the HMRC-approved Save-As-You-Earn (“SAYE”) option plan under which employees contribute a monthly 
amount which is saved over three years to buy shares. The options are exercisable from 1 February 2025. There are no performance conditions.
(d) Granted on 26 August 2022 under the HMRC-approved Save-As-You-Earn (“SAYE”) option plan under which employees contribute a monthly 
amount which is saved over three years to buy shares. The options are exercisable from 1 October 2025. There are no performance conditions.
(e) Granted on 12 October 2022 under the Company’s LTIP. The options will vest three years from grant subject to absolute Total Shareholder Return 
(TSR) Targets. For awards up to 100% of salary, 25% will vest for TSR of 5% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 10% p.a. For awards 
between 100% and 200% of salary, 0% will vest for TSR of 10% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 15% p.a.
(f) Granted on 19 September 2023 under the Company’s LTIP. The options will vest three years from grant subject to absolute Total Shareholder 
Return (TSR) Targets. For awards up to 100% of salary, 25% will vest for TSR of 5% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 10% p.a. 
For awards between 100% and 200% of salary, 0% will vest for TSR of 10% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 15% p.a.
On 4 March 2024 the Executive Directors were awarded a cash-settled share-share based bonus scheme which will pay 
out in the event of a change of control of the Company within 12 months, subject to the discretion of the Remuneration 
Committee. A Stochastic model has been used to measure the fair value of this cash-settled share-based payment 
transaction. No expense has been recognised at the year end as the fair value of the scheme (£6k impact for FY24) is not 
considered material.
Directors’ Remuneration Report – Annual Statement 
68
69
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Governance
Governance

Directors’ interests in shares
The interests (both beneficial and family interests) of the Directors in office at the date of this report in the share capital of 
the Company were as follows: 
Interests in 
ordinary shares at 
31 March 2024 
(number)
Interests in 
ordinary shares at 
31 March 2023 
(number)
Interests in share-
based incentive 
options at 
31 March 2024 
(number)
Interests in share-
based incentive 
options at 
31 March 2023 
(number)
Executive
Peter Brotherton
452,479
437,136
1,799,219
1,436,514
David Senior
113,090
106,550
1,011,396
793,921
Non-Executive
Nick Bate
49,009
40,000
-
-
Alan Aubrey
 76,407
40,650
-
-
Oliver Scott1
-
 -
-
-
Michelle Senecal de Fonseca
-
-
-
-
1Oliver Scott is a beneficial owner of Kestrel Opportunities, who held 16,715,305 ordinary shares in the Company as at 31 March 2024.
Relative importance of spend on pay
The table below shows the Group’s expenditure on shareholder distributions (including dividends) and total employee  
pay expenditure. Additional information on the number of employees, total revenue and underlying profit has been 
provided for context. 
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000
Change 
%
Employee expenditure
38,399
34,479
11.4%
Distributions to shareholders
3,752
5,593
(32.9%)
Average number of employees
659
588
12.1%
Revenue 
163,150
141,674
15.2%
Adjusted EBITDA
28,316
24,492
15.6%
Share price
The market price of the Company’s shares on 31 March 2024 was 127.25p per share. The highest and lowest market prices 
during the FY24 were 133.76p and 101.41p respectively.
Michelle Senecal de Fonseca
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
15 August 2024
Directors’ Remuneration Report – Annual Statement (continued)
The Directors presents their annual report together with the audited Financial Statements for FY24.
Principal activity
The principal activity of the Group during the year was the supply of IT Managed Services. The Company is 
a holding company. 
The Strategic Report on pages 5-50 contains a review of the business, future developments and the principal risks 
and uncertainties. 
Dividends
A final dividend payment of 2.4p per share is expected to be paid on 24 January 2025, subject to approval at the Company’s 
AGM, to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 13 December 2024 with shares going ex-dividend on 12 
December 2024. The last day for Dividend Reinvestment Plan elections is 2 January 2025.
Substantial shareholders
As at 31 March 2024 and 31 July 2024 (being the latest practicable date before the publication of this report) the Company 
had been notified of the following significant interests in 3% or more in its ordinary shares:
31 March 2024 
(number)
31 March 2024 
%
31 July 2024 
(number)
31 July 2024 
%
Kestrel Investment Partners
32,710,733
20.67%
32,707,577
20.67%
Lombard Odier Asset Management
25,494,432
16.11%
25,071,779
15.84%
ND Capital Investments Ltd
25,320,355
16.00%
25,531,554
16.13%
Slater Investments
18,278,131
11.55%
18,280,768
11.55%
Harwood Capital
17,502,695
11.06%
17,480,000
11.04%
Chelverton Asset Management
5,807,856
3.67%
5,610,000
3.54%
As of 31 July 2024, the Company’s issued share capital is 158,884,919 ordinary shares.
Directors and their interests
The following were Directors of Redcentric plc during the year and at the date of approval of these Financial Statements:
•	
Nick Bate 
•	
Alan Aubrey 
•	
Helena Feltham (resigned 24 July 2023)
•	
Oliver Scott (appointed 1 December 2023)
•	
Michelle Senecal De Fonseca (appointed 13 February 2024)
•	
Peter Brotherton
•	
David Senior
Details of Directors’ remuneration, service agreements and interests in the share capital of the Company are provided in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 65-70. Details of the Directors’ contracts, remuneration and share options granted 
are also set out in the Annual report on remuneration, on pages 66-69.
All Directors will retire in accordance with the terms of the Articles of Association of the Company and, being eligible, will 
offer themselves for re-election at the forthcoming AGM.
Directors’ Report 
70
71
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Governance
Governance

Directors’ indemnities and liability insurance
As permitted by the Articles of Association, the Directors 
have the benefit of an indemnity which is a qualifying 
third-party indemnity provision as defined by Section 234 
of the Companies Act 2006. The indemnity was in force 
throughout the last financial year and is currently in force. 
The Company also purchased and maintained Directors’ 
and Officers’ liability insurance throughout the financial year 
in respect of itself and its Directors. 
Employees 
The Group’s employment policies are designed to ensure 
that they meet the statutory, social and market practices 
where the Group operates. The Group systematically 
provides colleagues with information on matters of concern 
to them (including through Group-wide announcements and 
all employee calls), consulting them or their representatives 
regularly (including through colleague forums, roadshows, 
the Company’s newsletter and the colleague survey), so that 
their views can be considered when making decisions that 
are likely to affect their interests. Colleague involvement in 
the Group’s performance is encouraged (including through 
employee share schemes such as the Save-As-You-Earn 
Scheme), as achieving a common awareness on the part of 
all colleagues of the financial and economic factors affecting 
the Group plays a major role in maintaining its relationship 
with its employees.
The Group is committed to employment policies, which 
follow best practice, based on equal opportunities for all 
colleagues, irrespective of sex, race, colour, disability or 
marital status. The Group gives full and fair consideration 
to applications for employment for disabled persons, 
having regard to their aptitudes and abilities. Appropriate 
arrangements are made for the continued employment and 
training, career development and promotion of disabled 
persons employed by the Group. 
For further information on our colleagues see pages 34-37 
of our Corporate Responsibility statement.
Going concern 
The Group’s activities and an outline of the developments 
taking place in relation to its services and marketplace are 
considered in the Strategic Report on pages 5-50.  
A commentary on the revenue, trading results and cash 
flows is provided in the financial review on pages 13-20.
Note 3 to the Financial Statements sets out the Group’s 
financial risks. The Group is forecast to be profitable and is 
cash generative with high and continuing levels of recurring 
revenue and high levels of cash conversion expected for the 
foreseeable future.
The Consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared 
and approved by the Directors in accordance with applicable 
law and UK-adopted international accounting standards.
The Financial Statements are prepared on a going concern 
basis which the Directors believe to be appropriate for the 
following reasons.
The Group and Company meets their day to day working 
capital requirements from the Group’s operational cash 
flows, a Revolving Credit Facility, Asset Financing Facility 
and leasing arrangements (see Note 24). The Revolving 
Credit Facility is an £80.0m facility (net £40.0m utilised at  
31 March 2024), while the Asset Financing Facility is a £7.0m 
facility (increased to £10.0m in August 2024). £3.6m utilised 
at 31 March 2024. In March 2024 the Revolving Credit 
Facility and Asset Financing Facility were extended at the 
Group’s request, with a new maturity date of 26 April 2026.
The Directors have prepared cash flow forecasts for a 
period of at least 12 months from the date of approval of 
these Financial Statements (the “going concern assessment 
period”) which indicate that, taking account of reasonably 
possible downsides on the operations and its financial 
resources, the Group and the Company will have sufficient 
funds to meet their liabilities as they fall due for that period, 
and will comply with debt covenants over that period. 
The Group is required to comply with financial debt 
covenants for adjusted leverage (net debt to adjusted 
EBITDA), cashflow cover (adjusted cashflow to debt service, 
where adjusted cashflow is defined as adjusted EBITDA 
less tax paid, dividend payments, IFRS16 lease repayments 
and cash capital expenditure) and provisions relating to 
guarantor coverage such that guarantors must exceed a 
prescribed threshold of the Group’s gross assets, revenue 
and adjusted EBITDA. The guarantors are Redcentric plc 
and Redcentric Solutions Limited. Covenants are tested 
quarterly each year. 
During FY24 the Group has continued to invest heavily in 
integration and efficiency programmes which are expected 
to deliver significant benefits to the business from FY25 
onward. In addition, a significant proportion of the Group’s 
focus has been on the Harrogate data centre relocation 
in favour of delivering other projects including the further 
consolidation of cloud platforms. In anticipation of the 
effect of these factors on continued covenant compliance, 
particularly as the covenant tests are on a rolling 12-month 
basis, in June 2024 the Directors reached agreement with 
the banking syndicate to apply less stringent debt covenant 
requirements for the quarters ended June and September 
2024, despite not anticipating a breach at these quarters. 
The purpose of this amendment was to provide additional 
headroom on covenants in the event of a severe but 
plausible downside scenario, and to provide additional
Directors’ Report (continued)
Going concern (continued) 
flexibility around the timing and financing of capital 
expenditure for new customer projects. There were no 
other material changes to the terms and conditions of the 
borrowings because of this amendment. All requirements 
within the borrowings facility agreement and subsequent 
amendments have been adhered to in the respective 
quarters, with the banking syndicate further agreeing not to 
apply a clause relating to the retrospective inclusion of the 
January 2024 dividend into the December 2023 covenant 
calculation. This clause is no longer applicable from April 
2024 onwards.
The Directors’ forecasts in respect of the going concern 
assessment period have been built from the detailed Board 
approved budget for the year ending 31 March 2025, and a 
forecast for the year ending 31 March 2026, and the going 
concern assessment takes account of the debt covenant 
requirements. 
The forecasts include a number of assumptions in relation 
to order intake, renewal and churn rates, EBITDA margin 
improvements, the full year impact of energy efficiency 
investment and improved electricity pricing (a significant 
proportion of which is locked in through FY25 at forward rates 
favourable to those achieved in FY24). Revenue assumptions 
reflect levels achieved in FY24 plus organic growth, and have 
been adjusted for the enlarged customer base and additional 
products following the acquisitions made in FY23.
Whilst the Group’s trading and cash flow forecasts have been 
prepared using current trading assumptions, the operating 
environment continues to present several challenges which 
could negatively impact the actual performance achieved. 
These risks include, but are not limited to, achieving 
forecast levels of new order intake, the impact on customer 
confidence as a result of general economic conditions, 
inflationary cost pressures including unexpected one-off 
cost impacts, and the efficacy of energy efficiency measures 
under a prolonged period of hot weather. In making 
their going concern assessment in light of these risks, 
the Directors have also modelled a combined severe but 
plausible downside scenario when preparing the forecasts. 
The downside scenario assumes significant economic 
downturn over FY25 and into FY26, primarily impacting 
recurring new order intake and non-recurring product and 
services revenues as the Directors note the uncertainties 
surrounding the timing and extent of non-recurring revenue 
from quarter to quarter. In this scenario, recurring monthly 
order intake is forecast to reduce by 30% compared to 
base case budget and product and services non-recurring 
revenues reduce by 20% compared to base case budget 
incorporating potential supply chain issues, reduced 
investment from our existing customer base and failure to 
expand market share as planned. In addition, the downside 
scenario also assumes the new business obtained does not 
achieve the gross margin planned, with a 10% reduction 
to the planned gross margin achievement across all new 
recurring revenue modelled. 
An additional factor that can impact the revenue and gross 
margin assumptions in the going concern assessment 
period is the level of customer cancellations (of an individual 
service or product). Whilst known, near-term customer 
cancellations have been modelled, coupled with an 
underlying level of customer cancellations based on historic 
trends, there remains a risk that unexpected, medium to 
large customer cancellations could occur in the near-term. 
The Group is protected contractually to a large extent with 
notice periods and cancellation clauses, however a residual 
risk remains. An additional level of customer cancellations 
has therefore been modelled each quarter in the downside 
scenario to reflect this risk. 
Following the energy efficiency measures delivered in FY24, 
electricity volumes are significantly more predictable than 
they have been historically. In addition, power prices are 
90% fixed (at current volumes) through to September 2025. 
However there remains a risk that periods of sustained 
higher summer temperatures, considering the impacts of 
wider climate-related factors, could increase energy usage at 
sites where new efficiency measures have been introduced, 
but not tested, at these prolonged higher temperatures.  
A 5% increase in forecasted usage has been modelled across 
a period of three months over the summer to reflect this risk.
With respect to the remaining operating cost base, whilst 
the Board approved forecast contains detailed, itemised cost 
forecasts (including inflation), there remains a risk inherent 
within the industry related to the complex cost base and 
significant volumes of services procured that unexpected 
costs and/or unexpected cost increases can at times occur. 
In the severe but plausible downside scenario, an additional 
quarterly cost shock has been modelled to reflect this risk. 
In preparing the cash flow forecasts and analysis relating 
to debt covenant compliance through the going concern 
assessment period, the Directors have considered the 
nature of exceptional items and are satisfied that such items 
meet the Group’s accounting policy and borrowings facility 
agreement definition of exceptional items.
Given external market analysis indicates an expectation that 
interest rates have stabilised, no sensitivity on interest rates 
has been included in the plausible downside scenario. Both 
the base case and severe but plausible downside forecast 
scenarios continue to model the payment of dividends, 
including a final FY24 dividend payment in January 2025. 
The Directors will continue to monitor the impact and timing 
of dividend payments in the normal course of their quarterly 
liquidity and debt covenant compliance monitoring.
Directors’ Report 
72
73
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Governance
Governance

Going concern (continued) 
In addition to the base case and severe but plausible 
downside forecasts, the Directors have modelled an overlay 
scenario in anticipation of an EBITDA enhancing, significant 
new customer contract. This contract would necessitate 
certain upfront capital expenditure, with revenues following 
later in the forecast period when services commence. As 
a result, in August 2024 agreement was reached with the 
Group’s lenders to increase the Asset Financing Facility 
limit to £10.0m. The overlay scenario models the impacts 
of this potential new contract into the base case and severe 
but plausible downside forecasts, including the timing and 
financing of related capital expenditure, and the resulting 
impacts on debt covenant compliance. 
Under the downside scenario modelled, the forecasts 
demonstrate that the Group is expected to maintain 
sufficient liquidity and will continue to comply with the 
relevant debt covenants without management taking 
mitigating actions. While not modelled, mitigating actions 
which are within the Group’s control would also be available 
in the event of a severe downside. Such actions include, 
but are not limited to, the rephasing of discretionary capital 
expenditure, further usage of the Asset Financing Facility 
beyond that forecast currently (headroom at the date of 
approval of these Financial Statements is £3.1m) and further 
management of discretionary cost areas such as marketing, 
training and travel. 
The Directors therefore remain confident that the Group 
and Company have adequate resources to continue to meet 
their liabilities as and when they fall due within the period of 
at least 12 months from the date of this Report.
Purchase of own shares
The authority to make purchases of the Company’s shares 
on its behalf was given by resolution of the shareholders 
at the Company’s 2019 and 2020 AGM, and in September 
2019 the Company announced that it had approved a 
share buyback programme of the Company’s ordinary 
shares for an aggregate purchase price of up to £2m 
(the “Programme”). The Company announced shortly 
after the end of FY20 that the Programme would be 
temporarily halted until such time as the outlook around 
COVID-19 became more certain and in November 2020, 
in the announcement of its results for the six months to 30 
September 2020, the Company announced that it would 
reinstate the Programme. During FY22 the Company 
recommenced the Programme and obtained approval from 
the Board to increase the aggregate consideration payable 
under the Programme to £5m in total, resulting in 2,160,500 
shares repurchased and a closing balance of 2,170,203 
shares at the end of FY22. No further purchases were made 
in FY23 and FY24, though several share options exercised 
during the year were settled using treasury shares meaning 
the number of shares held in treasury at 31 March 2024 was 
632,703 (31 March 2023: 728,722).
Annual General Meeting
The 2024 AGM will be held at the offices of Cavendish 
Capital Markets Limited at 1 Bartholomew Close, London 
EC1A 7BL at 11:00 on 26 September 2024. The notice 
convening the AGM and what shareholders should do to 
register their intention to attend and/or vote by proxy are 
contained in a separate circular to shareholders and on 
the Group’s website at https://www.redcentricplc.com/
investors/shareholder-documents/.
Corporate governance
The Group’s statement on corporate governance can be 
found in the Corporate Governance section of this Report 
and forms part of this Directors’ Report and is incorporated 
by reference.
The Group’s financial risk management objectives and 
policies are described in Note 3 to the Financial Statements.
Disclosure of information to the auditor
The Directors of the Company at the date of approval 
of these Financial Statements confirm, as far as they are 
aware, that there is no relevant audit information of which 
the auditor is unaware. The Directors have individually 
confirmed that they have taken all reasonable steps that 
they ought to have taken as Directors in order to make 
themselves aware of any relevant audit information and to 
establish that it has been communicated to the auditor.
Subsequent events
On the 14 August 2024 a modification to the bank facilities 
was agreed to increase the Asset Financing Facility to 
£10.0m to ensure adequate credit availability for future 
investment relating to new customer contracts. All other 
elements of the facility remained the same. There have been 
no other significant events between the balance sheet date 
and the date of approval of these accounts. 
By order of the Board
David Senior
Company Secretary
15 August 2024
Directors’ Report (continued)
The Directors are responsible for preparing this Report 
and the Group and Company Financial Statements in 
accordance with applicable law and regulations. 
Company law requires the Directors to prepare Group and 
parent company Financial Statements for each financial year. 
Under the AIM Rules of the London Stock Exchange they 
are required to prepare the Group Financial Statements 
in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting 
standards and applicable law and they have elected to 
prepare the parent Company Financial Statements in 
accordance with UK accounting standards and applicable 
law, including FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework.
Under company law the Directors must not approve the 
Financial Statements unless they are satisfied that they give 
a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and 
parent company and of the Group’s profit or loss for that 
period. In preparing each of the Group and parent company 
Financial Statements, the Directors are required to: 
•	
select suitable accounting policies and then apply them 
consistently; 
•	
make judgements and estimates that are reasonable, 
relevant, reliable and prudent; 
•	
for the Group Financial Statements, state whether they 
have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted 
international accounting standards; 
•	
for the parent company Financial Statements, state 
whether applicable UK accounting standards have been 
followed, subject to any material departures disclosed 
and explained in the Financial Statements; 
•	
assess the Group and parent company’s ability to 
continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, 
matters related to going concern; and 
•	
use the going concern basis of accounting unless they 
either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent 
Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic 
alternative but to do so. 
The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain 
the parent company’s transactions and disclose with 
reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position 
of the parent Company and enable them to ensure that 
its Financial Statements comply with the Companies Act 
2006. They are responsible for such internal control as 
they determine is necessary to enable the preparation 
of Financial Statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and have 
general responsibility for taking such steps as are 
reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of 
the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and other 
irregularities. 
Under applicable law and regulations, the Directors are 
also responsible for preparing a Strategic Report and a 
Directors’ Report that complies with that law and those 
regulations. 
The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and 
integrity of the corporate and financial information included 
on the Company’s website. Legislation in the UK governing 
the preparation and dissemination of Financial Statements 
may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.
By order of the Board
David Senior
Company Secretary
15 August 2024
Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 
74
75
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Governance
Governance

1.
Our opinion is unmodified 
We have audited the financial statements of Redcentric 
plc (“the Company”) for the year ended 31 March 2024 
which comprise the Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income, Consolidated Statement of 
Financial Position, Consolidated Cash Flow Statement, 
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity, Company 
Balance Sheet, Company Statement of Changes in Equity 
and the related notes, including the accounting policies 
in note 1 to both the consolidated financial statements 
and Company financial statements.
In our opinion: 
— the financial statements give a true and fair view of 
the state of the Group’s and of the parent 
Company’s affairs as at 31 March 2024 and of the 
Group’s loss for the year then ended; 
— the Group financial statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with UK‐adopted 
international accounting standards;
— the parent Company financial statements have been 
properly prepared in accordance with UK accounting 
standards, including FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure 
Framework; and 
— the financial statements have been prepared in 
accordance with the requirements of the Companies 
Act 2006.
Basis for opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance with 
International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) 
and applicable law. Our responsibilities are described 
below. We have fulfilled our ethical responsibilities 
under, and are independent of the Group in accordance 
with, UK ethical requirements including the FRC Ethical 
Standard as applied to listed other entities of public 
interest. We believe that the audit evidence we have 
obtained is a sufficient and appropriate basis for our 
opinion. 
Independent 
auditor’s report
to the members of Redcentric plc 
Overview
£1.4m (2023: £1.1m)
0.86% (2023: 0.78%) of Group 
Revenue
Materiality: 
Group financial 
statements as a whole
75% (2023: 96%) of Group loss 
before tax
Coverage
Key audit matters
vs 2023
◄►
Revenue Recognition
Recurring risks
Going concern
2.
Key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in the audit of the financial statements 
and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by us, including those 
which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the 
engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our 
opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters. In arriving at our audit opinion above, the key audit matters, 
in decreasing order of audit significance, were as follows:
[We continue to perform procedures over [identify key audit matter]. However, following [explain why risk is less significant this year], we 
have not assessed this as one of the most significant risks in our current year audit and, therefore, it is not separately identified in our 
report this year.]
Our response
The risk
We performed the detailed tests below rather than 
seeking to rely on any of the Group's controls because 
our knowledge of the design of these controls 
indicated that we would not be able to obtain the 
required evidence to support reliance on controls. Our 
procedures included: 
— Tests of detail: 
•
for a sample of revenue transactions 
recognised in the one month period prior to 
the balance sheet date, we assessed whether 
revenue was recognised in the appropriate 
period by comparing to supporting 
documentation such as invoices, contracts and 
customer correspondence, and assessed 
whether such revenue was recognised in line 
with the Group’s accounting policies;
•
for a sample of customer balances, we 
assessed the appropriateness of deferred 
income at the year‐end through inspection of 
contracts, invoices, customer correspondence 
and recalculations; 
•
we assessed the extent to which credit notes 
raised in the two month period after the 
balance sheet date may relate to revenue 
recognised in the year, comparing these 
amounts to the Group’s credit note and 
inaccurate billing provisions, and assessing if 
this was indicative of inappropriate revenue 
recognition;
•
we tested year‐end bank reconciliations, 
obtained bank confirmations as audit evidence 
over the Group’s cash balance, and evaluated 
the appropriateness of any significant 
reconciling items as such items may be 
indicative of inappropriate revenue 
recognition; and
•
for unexpected revenue journal postings 
(where the opposite side of the journal was 
posted to an account which would not be 
expected based on our understanding of 
business processes and transaction flows), and 
unexpected journal postings by the executive 
directors and senior management, we assessed 
the nature of the posting and obtained 
supporting documentation. 
— Assessing transparency: we considered the 
adequacy of the Group’s disclosures in respect of 
revenue recognition policies and the timing of 
revenue recognition.
Revenue recognition cut‐off
We identified potential incentives and 
pressures on the Directors relating to 
investor expectations, compliance with debt 
covenants and the achievement of 
remuneration and other strategic business 
targets which increase the risk of fraudulent 
revenue recognition, and in particular the 
overstatement of recurring revenues in the 
period.
Results for any given financial reporting 
period are expected to be affected by the 
revenue recognition policies in place, 
particularly for the Group’s recurring 
revenue stream which represents 91.4% of 
the Group’s total revenues, and the accurate 
deferral of related amounts at the balance 
sheet date. There is a risk that amounts 
recorded in recurring revenue could be 
subject to manipulation, particularly through 
the inappropriate recognition and deferral of 
amounts at the year end. There are manual 
aspects to the recurring revenue recognition 
process, which provide an opportunity for 
fraudulent revenue recognition over the cut‐
off period. 
There is a resulting risk that recurring 
revenue transactions in the one month 
period before the balance sheet date could 
be fraudulently recorded, such that revenue 
is not recognised in line with the Group’s 
accounting policies, and that related 
deferred income amounts recorded at the 
balance sheet date are incomplete. 
Recurring revenue recognition 
(£149.1 million; 2023: £128.5 
million)
Refer to pages 89 ‐ 91 (accounting 
policy) and note 6 (financial 
disclosures)
76
77
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

Our response
The risk
We considered whether these risks could plausibly affect the 
liquidity or covenant compliance in the going concern period by 
assessing the directors’ sensitivities over the level of available 
financial resources and covenant thresholds indicated by the 
Group’s financial forecasts taking account of severe, but 
plausible, adverse effects that could arise from these risks 
individually and collectively.  Our procedures also included:
— Funding assessment: we read the borrowing facilities 
agreement and subsequent amendment letters to 
understand the terms, including covenant requirements. 
We reperformed the key financial covenant calculations at 
the measurement points throughout the going concern 
assessment period, assessing compliance at these dates. 
We considered the adjustments made in the adjusted 
cashflow and adjusted EBITDA measures for the covenant 
calculations, considering the appropriateness of such 
adjustments compared to the borrowing agreements and 
historically accepted practice with the lenders. In doing so, 
we assessed the classification of exceptional items in the 
context of the borrowing agreement definition, evaluating 
the impacts on debt covenant calculations.
— Historical comparisons: we assessed the ability of the 
Group to accurately forecast by comparing actual 
performance to forecasts, including for adjusted EBITDA, 
levels of new order intake and non‐recurring revenues 
compared to previous projections. 
— Test of detail: we critically assessed the cash flow forecasts 
by considering the appropriateness of key assumptions 
used in preparing those projections, with a focus on 
revenue growth and new order intake, electricity volume 
and price assumptions, and the timing and extent of 
cashflows, including capital expenditure and dividend 
payments. In assessing the timing and extent of capital 
expenditure, we considered the upfront capital investment 
required to take on a significant new customer contract.   
— Sensitivity analysis: we critically challenged the downside 
sensitivities applied in the downside forecast scenario, 
assessing whether these represented severe but plausible 
scenarios based on our knowledge of the business and 
considering the most recent trading results. We performed 
additional stress testing over the remaining covenant 
headroom levels under a severe but plausible downside 
scenario. 
— Evaluating directors’ intent: we evaluated the achievability 
of the actions the directors have modelled in the base case 
and severe but plausible downside scenario, including 
utilisation of the Group’s asset financing facility and the 
timing of dividend payments, taking into account the extent 
to which the directors can control the timing and outcome 
of these. 
— Assessing transparency: we assessed whether the matters 
included in the going concern disclosure in note 1.1 give a 
full and accurate description of the directors’ assessment, 
including the judgements made, identified risks and 
mitigating actions. 
Disclosure quality 
The financial statements explain how the Board has 
formed a judgement that it is appropriate to adopt 
the going concern basis of preparation for the 
Group and parent Company. 
That judgement is based on an evaluation of the 
inherent risks to the Group’s and Company’s 
business model and how those risks might affect 
the Group’s and Company’s financial resources or 
ability to continue operations over a period of at 
least a year from the date of approval of the 
financial statements. 
The risks most likely to adversely affect the Group’s 
and Company’s available financial resources and/or 
metrics relevant to debt covenants over this period 
were:
•
The inability to achieve the growth and new 
order intake targets in the base case 
forecasts; 
•
A reduction in non‐recurring revenues 
resulting from a loss of customer confidence, 
and uncertainties over the timing and extent 
of non‐recurring revenues from quarter to 
quarter;
•
The timing and extent of cash outflows 
relating to capital expenditure and dividends, 
and their resulting impacts on debt covenant 
compliance; and
•
The classification of certain costs as 
exceptional items, which are excluded from 
adjusted EBITDA and are not defined by 
IFRSs, and the resulting impacts on the 
Group’s debt covenant calculations.
There are also less predictable but realistic second 
order impacts, such as the erosion of customer 
confidence resulting in increased cancellation rates 
for recurring revenues, which could result in a rapid 
reduction of available financial resources. 
The risk is shown as reducing as there is a greater 
level of headroom on the Group’s debt covenants 
throughout the going concern assessment period 
when compared to the prior year, and there is 
reduced uncertainty around other risks identified 
in the prior year including the failure to achieve 
forecast energy efficiencies, and adverse impacts 
from inflationary pressures, such as interest rates. 
The risk for our audit was whether or not those 
risks were such that they amounted to a material 
uncertainty that may have cast significant doubt 
about the ability to continue as a going concern. 
Had they been such, then that fact would have 
been required to have been disclosed. 
Going Concern 
(Group and parent 
Company)
See note 1.1 to the 
Group Financial 
Statements
Refer to page 63 (Audit 
Committee Report), and 
pages 72 ‐ 74 (Directors’ 
Report).
The valuation of intangible assets acquired in the Sungard and 4D Data Centres acquisitions and valuation of certain property, plant and 
equipment acquired as part of the Sungard business combination was a key audit matter in the prior year. However, due to these acquisitions 
completing in the prior period, there is no remaining judgement or estimation uncertainty relating to these acquisitions, and therefore we have 
not assessed this as one of our most significant risks in the current year audit.
The recoverability of the parent Company’s investment in subsidiaries was a parent Company key audit matter in the prior year. However, during 
the audit we concluded that our work in respect of going concern had a greater effect on the overall parent Company audit strategy, and 
allocation of resources. As a result of this, and the inclusion of going concern as a Group and parent Company key audit matter, we have not 
assessed the recoverability of the parent Company’s investment in subsidiaries as one of our most significant risks in the current year audit of the 
parent Company. 
96
3
100
Group loss before tax
Group total assets 
100%
(2023: 99%)
87
9
75
75%
(2023: 96%)
100
0
100
0
100%
(2023: 100%)
Key: 
Full scope for group audit purposes 2024
Full scope for group audit purposes 2023
Specified risk‐focused audit procedures 2023
Residual components
Group revenue
3. Our application of materiality and an overview of the 
scope of our audit
Materiality for the Group financial statements as a whole was 
set at £1.4m (2023: £1.1m), determined with reference to a 
benchmark of total revenue of £163.1m (2023: £141.7m), of 
which it represents 0.86% (2023: 0.78%). We consider total 
revenue to be the most appropriate benchmark as it provides a 
more stable measure year on year than group loss before tax, 
and is reflective of the size and complexity of the Group.
Materiality for the parent Company financial statements as a 
whole was set at £0.8m (2023: £0.52m), determined with 
reference to a benchmark of parent Company total assets, of 
which it represents 0.75% (2023: 0.49%).
In line with our audit methodology, our procedures on 
individual account balances and disclosures were performed 
to a lower threshold, performance materiality, so as to reduce 
to an acceptable level the risk that individually immaterial 
misstatements in individual account balances add up to a 
material amount across the financial statements as a whole. 
Performance materiality was set at 75% (2023: 65%) of 
materiality for the financial statements as a whole, which 
equates to £1.05m (2023: £0.715m) for the Group and £0.6m 
(2023: £0.34m) for the parent Company. We applied this 
percentage in our determination of performance materiality 
because we did not identify any factors indicating an elevated 
level of risk.
We agreed to report to the Audit Committee any corrected or 
uncorrected identified misstatements exceeding £70,000 
(2023: £55,000), in addition to other identified misstatements 
that warranted reporting on qualitative grounds.
Of the Group’s 5 (2023: 6) reporting components, we 
subjected 1 (2023: 1) to full scope audits for group purposes 
and 0 (2023: 1) to specified risk‐focused audit procedures.
The components within the scope of our work accounted for 
the percentages illustrated opposite. As group loss before tax 
is smaller this year, the profits and losses in respect of the 
residual components represent a higher percentage of group 
loss before tax. The profits and losses in respect of residual 
components for the year ended 31 March 2024 are less than 
group materiality. The remaining 25% (2023: 4%) of group loss 
before tax is represented by 4 (2023: 4) reporting 
components, none of which individually represented more 
than 1% (2023: 1%) of total group revenue or total group 
assets. The group loss before tax coverage is higher in the 
prior year reflecting the larger overall group loss before tax in 
2023 (of which residual components formed a smaller 
proportion), and a change in methodology in calculating the 
loss before tax attributable to residual components. 
For the residual 4 (2023: 4) components, we performed 
analysis at an aggregated group level to re‐examine our 
assessment that there were no significant risks of material 
misstatement within these.
The work on the 1 (2023: 2) components, and the audit of the 
parent Company, was performed by the Group team. 
Component materiality was £1.2m (2023: component 
materialities ranged from £0.4m to £0.8m, having regard to the 
mix of size and risk profile of the Group across the 
components).
The scope of the audit work performed was predominately 
substantive as we placed limited reliance upon the Group's 
internal control over financial reporting.
Total revenue
£163.1m (2023: £141.7m)
Group materiality
£1.4m (2023: £1.1m)
Total revenue
Group materiality
£1.4m
Whole financial
statements materiality (2023: 
£1.1m)
£1.05m
Whole financial
statements performance 
materiality (2023: £0.715m)
£1.2m
Materiality at 1 component 
(£1.2m) 
(2023: range of materiality at 2 
components £0.39m to £0.8m)
£70,000
Misstatements reported to the 
audit committee (2023: £55,000)
78
79
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

4.
Going concern
The directors have prepared the financial statements on the 
going concern basis as they do not intend to liquidate the Group 
or the Company or to cease their operations, and as they have 
concluded that the Group’s and the Company’s financial position 
means that this is realistic. They have also concluded that there 
are no material uncertainties that could have cast significant 
doubt over their ability to continue as a going concern for at least 
a year from the date of approval of the financial statements (“the 
going concern period”).  
An explanation of how we evaluated management’s assessment 
of going concern is set out in the related key audit matter in 
section 2 of this report.
Our conclusions based on this work:
— we consider that the directors’ use of the going concern basis 
of accounting in the preparation of the financial statements is 
appropriate;
— we have not identified, and concur with the directors’ 
assessment that there is not, a material uncertainty related to 
events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may 
cast significant doubt on the Group’s or Company's ability to 
continue as a going concern for the going concern period; and
— we found the going concern disclosure in note 1.1 to be 
acceptable.
However, as we cannot predict all future events or conditions 
and as subsequent events may result in outcomes that are 
inconsistent with judgements that were reasonable at the time 
they were made, the above conclusions are not a guarantee that 
the Group or the Company will continue in operation. 
Further detail in respect of the revenue recognition cut‐off risk is 
set out in the key audit matter disclosures in section 2 of this 
report.
We performed procedures including: 
— Identifying journal entries and other adjustments to test 
based on certain risk criteria, and comparing the identified 
entries to supporting documentation. This included those 
journals with unexpected account pairings or posted by 
unexpected users;
— Assessing if any bias is present in the significant judgement in 
relation to the classification of exceptional items, which are 
excluded from adjusted EBITDA; and
— Performing procedures over revenue recognition as disclosed 
in section 2 of this report.
Identifying and responding to risks of material misstatement due 
to non‐compliance with laws and regulations
We identified areas of laws and regulations that could reasonably 
be expected to have a material effect on the financial statements 
from our general commercial and sector experience and through 
discussion with the directors and other management (as required 
by auditing standards), and from inspection of the Group’s legal 
and regulatory correspondence and discussed with the directors 
and other management the policies and procedures regarding 
compliance with laws and regulations.  
We communicated identified laws and regulations throughout 
our team and remained alert to any indications of non‐
compliance throughout the audit. 
The potential effect of these laws and regulations on the financial 
statements varies considerably.
Firstly, the Group is subject to laws and regulations that directly 
affect the financial statements including financial reporting 
legislation (including related companies legislation), distributable 
profits legislation and taxation legislation and we assessed the 
extent of compliance with these laws and regulations as part of 
our procedures on the related financial statement items.  
Secondly, the Group is subject to many other laws and 
regulations where the consequences of non‐compliance could 
have a material effect on amounts or disclosures in the financial 
statements, for instance through the imposition of fines or 
litigation. We identified the following areas as those most likely 
to have such an effect: health and safety, anti‐bribery and 
corruption, employment law, data protection regulations, 
environmental protection legislation and contract legislation. 
Auditing standards limit the required audit procedures to identify 
non‐compliance with these laws and regulations to enquiry of 
the directors and other management and inspection of legal 
correspondence, if any. Therefore if a breach of operational 
regulations is not disclosed to us or evident from relevant 
correspondence, an audit will not detect that breach.
Context of the ability of the audit to detect fraud or breaches of 
law or regulation
Owing to the inherent limitations of an audit, there is an 
unavoidable risk that we may not have detected some material 
misstatements in the financial statements, even though we have 
properly planned and performed our audit in accordance with 
auditing standards. For example, the further removed non‐
compliance with laws and regulations is from the events and 
transactions reflected in the financial statements, the less likely 
the inherently limited procedures required by auditing standards 
would identify it.  
5.
Fraud and breaches of laws and regulations – ability to detect
Identifying and responding to risks of material misstatement due to 
fraud
To identify risks of material misstatement due to fraud (“fraud 
risks”) we assessed events or conditions that could indicate an 
incentive or pressure to commit fraud or provide an opportunity to 
commit fraud. Our risk assessment procedures included:
— Enquiring of directors and the Audit Committee, and inspection 
of policy documentation as to the Group’s high‐level policies 
and procedures to prevent and detect fraud, as well as whether 
they have knowledge of any actual, suspected or alleged fraud;
— Reading Board, Audit Committee, and Remuneration 
Committee minutes;
— Considering remuneration incentive schemes, performance 
targets and strategic business objectives for the directors; and
— Using analytical procedures to identify any unusual or 
unexpected relationships.
We communicated identified fraud risks throughout the audit team 
and remained alert to any indications of fraud throughout the 
audit.
As required by auditing standards, and taking into account possible 
pressures to meet profit targets in a given year, we perform 
procedures to address the risk of management override of controls 
and the risk of fraudulent revenue recognition, in particular the risk 
that Group management may be in a position to make 
inappropriate accounting entries; and the risk that revenue is 
overstated through recording revenues in the wrong period. 
We did not identify any additional fraud risks. 
In addition, as with any audit, there remained a higher risk of 
non‐detection of fraud, as these may involve collusion, forgery, 
intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of 
internal controls. Our audit procedures are designed to detect 
material misstatement. We are not responsible for preventing 
non‐compliance or fraud and cannot be expected to detect non‐
compliance with all laws and regulations.
6.
We have nothing to report on the other information in the 
Annual Report
The directors are responsible for the other information 
presented in the Annual Report together with the financial 
statements. Our opinion on the financial statements does not 
cover the other information and, accordingly, we do not express 
an audit opinion or, except as explicitly stated below, any form of 
assurance conclusion thereon. 
Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing 
so, consider whether, based on our financial statements audit 
work, the information therein is materially misstated or 
inconsistent with the financial statements or our audit 
knowledge. Based solely on that work we have not identified 
material misstatements in the other information.
Strategic report and directors’ report 
Based solely on our work on the other information: 
— we have not identified material misstatements in the 
strategic report and the directors’ report; 
— in our opinion the information given in those reports for the 
financial year is consistent with the financial statements; and 
— in our opinion those reports have been prepared in 
accordance with the Companies Act 2006. 
7.  We have nothing to report on the other matters on which we 
are required to report by exception 
Under the Companies Act 2006, we are required to report to you 
if, in our opinion: 
— adequate accounting records have not been kept by the 
parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not 
been received from branches not visited by us; or 
— the parent Company financial statements are not in 
agreement with the accounting records and 
returns; or 
— certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by 
law are not made; or 
— we have not received all the information and explanations 
we require for our audit.
We have nothing to report in these respects.
8.
Respective responsibilities 
Directors’ responsibilities 
As explained more fully in their statement set out on page 75, 
the directors are responsible for: the preparation of the financial 
statements including being satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view; such internal control as they determine is necessary to 
enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from 
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error; assessing 
the Group and, parent Company’s ability to continue as a going 
concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going 
concern; and using the going concern basis of accounting unless 
they either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent Company 
or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do 
so. 
Auditor’s responsibilities 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether 
the financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue our 
opinion in an auditor’s report. Reasonable assurance is a high 
level of assurance, but does not guarantee that an audit 
conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a 
material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise 
from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or 
in aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the 
economic decisions of users taken on the basis of the financial 
statements. 
A fuller description of our responsibilities is provided on the 
FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. 
9.
The purpose of our audit work and to whom we owe our 
responsibilities
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, 
in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 
2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might 
state to the Company’s members those matters we are required 
to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. 
To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or 
assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the 
Company’s members, as a body, for our audit work, for this 
report, or for the opinions we have formed.
Christopher Vaulks (Senior Statutory Auditor) 
for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor 
Chartered Accountants 
Quayside House
110 Quayside
Newcastle upon Tyne
Tyne and Wear
NE1 3DX
15 August 2024
80
81
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

Note
Year ended 
31 March 
2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 
2023 
£000
Revenue
6
163,150
141,674
Cost of sales
(45,115)
(40,763)
Gross profit
118,035
100,911
Operating costs
(119,283)
(109,938)
Other operating income
7
-
88
Gain on settlement of contingent consideration
9
2,100
-
Adjusted EBITDA1
28,316
24,492
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
16
(6,089)
(4,636)
Amortisation of intangibles
15
(6,010)
(8,773)
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
17
(11,777)
(10,617)
Exceptional costs
9
(4,550)
(8,149)
Exceptional income
9
2,100
-
Share-based payments
28
(1,138)
(1,256)
Operating profit /(loss)
852
(8,939)
Finance costs
10
(5,502)
(3,530) 
Loss before taxation
(4,650)
(12,469) 
Income tax credit
12
1,209
3,219
Loss for the period attributable to owners of the parent
(3,441)
(9,250) 
Other comprehensive income
Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss:
Currency translation differences
(117)
(97)
Deferred tax movement on share options
-
47
Total comprehensive loss for the period
(3,558)
(9,300) 
Earnings per share
Basic loss per share
13
(2.20p)
(5.94p) 
Diluted loss per share
13
(2.20p)
(5.94p) 
1 For an explanation and reconciliation of the alternative performance measures used in this report, please refer to pages 22-25.
The Notes on pages 87-131 are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income  
for the year ended 31 March 2024
Note
31 March 2024 
£000
31 March 2023 
£000
Non-Current Assets
Intangible assets
15
78,883
83,217
Property, plant and equipment
16
21,422
17,131
Right-of-use assets
17
37,478
46,282
Trade and other receivables
20
3,307
-
Deferred tax asset
18
2,503
1,076
143,593
147,706
Current Assets
Inventories
19
4,187
3,716
Trade and other receivables
20
33,543
39,254
Corporation tax receivable
53
48
Cash and cash equivalents
3,130
1,366
40,913
44,384
Total Assets
184,506
192,090
Current Liabilities
Trade and other payables
22
42,154
43,578
Bank loans and asset financing
24
1,149
475
Lease liabilities
24
8,903
10,804
Provisions
26
892
1,841
Contingent consideration
23
-
2,990
53,098
59,688
Non-Current Liabilities
Bank loans and asset financing 
24
42,366
33,651
Lease liabilities
24
23,077
29,400
Provisions
26
11,482
11,160
76,925
74,211
Total Liabilities
130,023
133,899
Net Assets
54,483
58,191
Equity
Called up share capital
27
159
157
Share premium account
27
75,649
73,267
Common control reserve
(9,454)
(9,454)
Own shares held in treasury
27
(779)
(898)
Retained earnings
(11,092)
(4,881)
Total Equity
54,483
58,191
The Notes on pages 87-131 are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.
The Financial Statements of Redcentric Plc (Registration Number 08397584) on pages 82-85, and the Notes to these 
Financial Statements on pages 87-131 were approved by the Board on 15 August 2024 and are signed on its behalf by:
David Senior 
Chief Financial Officer
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position  
as at 31 March 2024
82
83
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

Note
Year ended 
31 March 
2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 
2023 
£000
Loss before taxation
(4,650)
(12,469)
Finance costs
10
5,502
3,530
Operating profit/(loss)
852
(8,939)
Adjustment for non-cash items
Depreciation and amortisation
15,16,17
23,876
24,026
Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment
(53)
-
Exceptional income
9
(2,100)
-
Exceptional costs
9
4,550
8,149
Share-based payments
28
1,138
1,256
Operating cash flow before exceptional items and movements in working capital
28,263
24,492
Cash costs of exceptional items
9
(4,240)
(8,258)
Cash costs of provisions
(978)
-
Operating cash flow before changes in working capital
23,045
16,234
Changes in working capital
Increase in inventories
(471)
(2,324)
Decrease/(increase) in trade and other receivables
2,411
(15,463)
(Decrease)/increase in trade and other payables
(1,826)
16,377
Cash generated from operations
23,159
14,824
Tax paid
(174)
(670)
Net cash generated from operating activities
22,985
14,154
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
(9,265)
(5,505)
Acquisition of subsidiaries (net of cash acquired)
(890)
(26,606)
Purchase of intangible assets
(1,479)
(869)
Net cash used in investing activities
(11,634)
(32,980)
Cash flows from financing activities
Dividends paid
14
(1,369)
(5,593)
Disposal of treasury shares on exercise of share options
116
229
Financing of property, plant and equipment
2,419
966
Interest paid on bank loans, term loans and asset financing
(3,569)
(1,771)
Interest paid on leases
(1,328)
(1,218)
Repayment of leases
24
(10,638)
(6,901)
Repayment of asset financing liabilities
24
(635)
-
Repayment of term loans
24
(474)
(508)
Drawdown of bank loans
24
16,500
55,500
Repayment of bank loans 
24
(10,500)
(21,500)
Payment of loan arrangement fees
-
(713)
Net cash used in financing activities
(9,478)
18,491
Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
1,873
(335)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period
1,366
1,804
Effect of exchange rates
(109)
(103)
Cash and cash equivalents at end of the period
3,130
1,366
The Notes on pages 87-131 are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.
Consolidated Cash Flow Statement  
for the year ended 31 March 2024
Share 
capital
Share 
premium
Common 
control 
 reserve
Own 
shares 
held in 
treasury 
Retained 
earnings
Total 
equity
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
At 1 April 2022 
157
73,267
(9,454) 
(2,673) 
10,551
71,848
Loss for the period
-
-
-
-
(9,250)
(9,250)
Transactions with owners
Share-based payments (Note 28)
-
-
-
-
1,044
1,044
Dividends paid (Note 14)
-
-
-
-
(5,593)
(5,593)
Share option exercises
-
-
-
1,775
(1,546)
229
Deferred tax relating to prior periods 
-
-
-
-
(37)
(37)
Other comprehensive income
Deferred tax movement on share options
-
-
-
-
47
47
Currency translation differences
-
-
-
-
(97)
(97)
At 31 March 2023
157
73,267
(9,454)
(898)
(4,881)
58,191
Loss for the period
-
-
-
-
(3,441)
(3,441)
Transactions with owners
Share-based payments (Note 28)
-
-
-
-
1,053
1,053
Issue of new shares (Note 27)
2
2,382
-
-
-
2,384
Dividends paid (Note 14)
-
-
-
-
(3,752)
(3,752)
Share option exercises 
-
-
-
119
(3)
116
Deferred tax movement on share options
-
-
-
-
78
78
Deferred tax relating to prior periods 
-
-
-
-
(29)
(29)
Other comprehensive income
Currency translation differences
-
-
-
-
(117)
(117)
At 31 March 2024
159
75,649
(9,454)
(779)
(11,092)
54,483
The Notes on pages 87-131 are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity  
for the year ended 31 March 2024
84
85
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

Working with the cloud team 
at Redcentric and our other 
development partners, we 
have been able to move critical 
business processes from traditional 
architectures to AWS RDS, enabling 
us to continue to develop and scale 
our All4 product, as our registered 
users base exceeds 22 million.
“
”
1 Summary of significant accounting policies
Redcentric plc is a public limited company incorporated and 
domiciled in England and Wales, whose shares are publicly 
traded on the AIM division of the London Stock Exchange. 
Redcentric plc was incorporated on 11 February 2013 and 
admitted to AIM on 24 April 2013. 
The Group Financial Statements have been prepared and 
approved by the Directors in accordance UK-adopted 
international accounting standards (“UK-adopted IFRS”).
The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation 
of these Consolidated Financial Statements are set out 
below. These policies have been applied consistently in the 
current and prior period.
These Financial Statements are presented in pound sterling, 
being the currency of the primary economic environment in 
which the Group operates. All amounts have been rounded 
to the nearest thousand (£’000), unless otherwise indicated.
The Financial Statements are prepared on the historical cost 
basis except that contingent consideration is measured at 
fair value.
1.1 Basis of preparation
The Financial Statements are prepared on a going concern 
basis which the Directors believe to be appropriate for the 
following reasons.
The Group and Company meets their day to day working 
capital requirements from the Group’s operational cash flows, 
a Revolving Credit Facility, Asset Financing Facility and leasing 
arrangements (see Note 24). The Revolving Credit Facility  
is an £80.0m facility (net £40.0m utilised at 31 March 2024), 
while the Asset Financing Facility is a £7.0m facility (increased 
to £10.0m in August 2024). £3.6m of the Asset Financing 
Facility was utilised at 31 March 2024. In March 2024 the 
Revolving Credit Facility and Asset Financing Facility were 
extended at the Group’s request, with a new maturity date  
of 26 April 2026.
The Directors have prepared cash flow forecasts for a 
period of at least 12 months from the date of approval of 
these Financial Statements (the “going concern assessment 
period”) which indicate that, taking account of reasonably 
possible downsides on the operations and its financial 
resources, the Group and the Company will have sufficient 
funds to meet their liabilities as they fall due for that period, 
and will comply with debt covenants over that period. 
The Group is required to comply with financial debt 
covenants for adjusted leverage (net debt to adjusted 
EBITDA), cashflow cover (adjusted cashflow to debt service, 
where adjusted cashflow is defined as adjusted EBITDA less 
tax paid, dividend payments, IFRS16 lease repayments and 
cash capital expenditure) and provisions relating to guarantor 
coverage such that guarantors must exceed a prescribed 
threshold of the Group’s gross assets, revenue and adjusted 
EBITDA. The guarantors are Redcentric plc and Redcentric 
Solutions Limited. Covenants are tested quarterly each year. 
During FY24 the Group has continued to invest heavily in 
integration and efficiency programmes which are expected to 
deliver significant benefits to the business from FY25 onward. 
In addition, a significant proportion of the Group’s focus has 
been on the Harrogate data centre relocation in favour of 
delivering other projects including the further consolidation 
of cloud platforms. In anticipation of the effect of these 
factors on continued covenant compliance, particularly as 
the covenant tests are on a rolling 12-month basis, in June 
2024 the Directors reached agreement with the banking 
syndicate to apply less stringent debt covenant requirements 
for the quarters ended June and September 2024, despite 
not anticipating a breach at these quarters. The purpose 
of this amendment was to provide additional headroom on 
covenants in the event of a severe but plausible downside 
scenario, and to provide additional flexibility around the 
timing and financing of capital expenditure for new customer 
projects. There were no other material changes to the 
terms and conditions of the borrowings because of this 
amendment. All requirements within the borrowings facility 
agreement and subsequent amendments have been adhered 
to in the respective quarters, with the banking syndicate 
further agreeing not to apply a clause relating to the 
retrospective inclusion of the January 2024 dividend into the 
December 2023 covenant calculation. This clause is no longer 
applicable from April 2024 onwards.
The Directors’ forecasts in respect of the going concern 
assessment period have been built from the detailed Board 
approved budget for the year ending 31 March 2025, and a 
forecast for the year ending 31 March 2026, and the going 
concern assessment takes account of the debt covenant 
requirements. 
The forecasts include a number of assumptions in relation 
to order intake, renewal and churn rates, EBITDA margin 
improvements, the full year impact of energy efficiency 
investment and improved electricity pricing (a significant 
proportion of which is locked in through FY25 at forward 
rates favourable to those achieved in FY24). Revenue 
assumptions reflect levels achieved in FY24 plus organic 
growth, and have been adjusted for the enlarged customer 
base and additional products following the acquisitions 
made in FY23.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024
86
87
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
86

1.1 Basis of preparation (continued)
Whilst the Group’s trading and cash flow forecasts have 
been prepared using current trading assumptions, the 
operating environment continues to present several 
challenges which could negatively impact the actual 
performance achieved. These risks include, but are not 
limited to, achieving forecast levels of new order intake, 
the impact on customer confidence as a result of general 
economic conditions, inflationary cost pressures including 
unexpected one-off cost impacts, and the efficacy of 
energy efficiency measures under a prolonged period of hot 
weather. In making their going concern assessment in light 
of these risks, the Directors have also modelled a combined 
severe but plausible downside scenario when preparing  
the forecasts. 
The downside scenario assumes significant economic 
downturn over FY25 and into FY26, primarily impacting 
recurring new order intake and non-recurring product and 
services revenues as the Directors note the uncertainties 
surrounding the timing and extent of non-recurring revenue 
from quarter to quarter. In this scenario, recurring monthly 
order intake is forecast to reduce by 30% compared to 
base case budget and product and services non-recurring 
revenues reduce by 20% compared to base case budget 
incorporating potential supply chain issues, reduced 
investment from our existing customer base and failure to 
expand market share as planned. In addition, the downside 
scenario also assumes the new business obtained does not 
achieve the gross margin planned, with a 10% reduction 
to the planned gross margin achievement across all new 
recurring revenue modelled. 
An additional factor that can impact the revenue and gross 
margin assumptions in the going concern assessment 
period is the level of customer cancellations (of an individual 
service or product). Whilst known, near-term customer 
cancellations have been modelled, coupled with an 
underlying level of customer cancellations based on historic 
trends, there remains a risk that unexpected, medium to 
large customer cancellations could occur in the near-term. 
The Group is protected contractually to a large extent with 
notice periods and cancellation clauses, however a residual 
risk remains. An additional level of customer cancellations 
has therefore been modelled each quarter in the downside 
scenario to reflect this risk. 
Following the energy efficiency measures delivered in FY24, 
electricity volumes are significantly more predictable than 
they have been historically. In addition, power prices are 
90% fixed (at current volumes) through to September 2025. 
However, there remains a risk that periods of sustained 
higher summer temperatures, considering the impacts 
of wider climate-related factors, could increase energy 
usage at sites where new efficiency measures have been 
introduced, but not tested, at these prolonged higher 
temperatures. A 5% increase in forecasted usage has been 
modelled across a period of three months over the summer 
to reflect this risk. 
With respect to the remaining operating cost base, whilst 
the Board approved forecast contains detailed, itemised 
cost forecasts (including inflation), there remains a risk 
inherent within the industry related to the complex cost 
base and significant volumes of services procured that 
unexpected costs and/or unexpected cost increases can  
at times occur. In the severe but plausible downside 
scenario, an additional quarterly cost shock has been 
modelled to reflect this risk. In preparing the cash flow 
forecasts and analysis relating to debt covenant compliance 
through the going concern assessment period, the Directors 
have considered the nature of exceptional items and are 
satisfied that such items meet the Group’s accounting  
policy and borrowings facility agreement definition of 
exceptional items.
Given external market analysis indicates an expectation that 
interest rates have stabilised, no sensitivity on interest rates 
has been included in the plausible downside scenario. Both 
the base case and severe but plausible downside forecast 
scenarios continue to model the payment of dividends, 
including a final FY24 dividend payment in January 2025. 
The Directors will continue to monitor the impact and timing 
of dividend payments in the normal course of their quarterly 
liquidity and debt covenant compliance monitoring.
In addition to the base case and severe but plausible 
downside forecasts, the Directors have modelled an overlay 
scenario in anticipation of an EBITDA enhancing, significant 
new customer contract. This contract would necessitate 
certain upfront capital expenditure, with revenues following 
later in the forecast period when services commence. As 
a result, in August 2024 agreement was reached with the 
Group’s lenders to increase the Asset Financing Facility 
limit to £10.0m. The overlay scenario models the impacts 
of this potential new contract into the base case and severe 
but plausible downside forecasts, including the timing and 
financing of related capital expenditure, and the resulting 
impacts on debt covenant compliance. 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
1.1 Basis of preparation (continued)
Under the downside scenario modelled, and including the 
new customer contract overlay, the forecasts demonstrate 
that the Group is expected to maintain sufficient liquidity 
and will continue to comply with the relevant debt 
covenants without management taking mitigating actions. 
While not modelled, mitigating actions which are within the 
Group’s control would also be available in the event of a 
severe downside. Such actions include, but are not limited 
to, the rephasing of discretionary capital expenditure, and 
further management of discretionary cost areas such as 
marketing, training and travel. 
The Directors therefore remain confident that the Group 
and Company have adequate resources to continue to meet 
their liabilities as and when they fall due within the period of 
at least 12 months from the date of this Report. 
1.2 Changes in accounting policy and disclosure
The amendment to IAS 12 Income Taxes for assets 
and liabilities arising from a single transaction has 
been recognised in the current year with the prior year 
comparative restated, refer to note 18. There is no 
requirement for a full retrospective application.
Adopted IFRS not yet applied
There are no new standards, amendments to existing 
standards or interpretations that are not yet effective that 
are expected to have a material impact on the Group. Such 
developments are routinely reviewed by the Group and its 
financial reporting systems are adapted as appropriate.
1.3 Basis of consolidation
The Group Financial Statements consolidate those of the 
Company and of its subsidiary undertakings drawn up to 
31 March 2024.
Subsidiaries are all entities over which the Group has 
control. The Group controls an entity when the Group 
is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its 
involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect 
those returns through its power over the entity. Subsidiaries 
are fully Consolidated from the date on which control is 
transferred to the Group. They are deconsolidated from the 
date that control ceases. 
Intra-group transactions, balances and unrealised gains 
and losses on transactions between group companies are 
eliminated on consolidation.
1.4 Segmental reporting 
IFRS 8 requires operating segments to be identified based 
on internal financial information reported to the chief 
operating decision-maker for decision-making purposes. 
The Group considers that this role is performed by the main 
Board. The Board believes that the Group continues to 
comprise a single reporting segment, being the provision of 
Managed Services to customers.
1.5 Revenue recognition 
IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from contracts with customers’ requires 
“performance obligations” to be identified at the inception 
of the contract for each of the distinct goods or services 
that have been promised to the customer. The following 
table summarises the performance obligations that we 
have identified for our major revenue lines and provides 
information on the time of when they are satisfied and the 
related revenue recognition policy. The Group does not 
consider that there are any significant judgements made in 
concluding when a customer obtains control of a promised 
good or service.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
88
89
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

1.5 Revenue recognition (continued)
Revenue line
Performance obligation
Revenue recognition policy
Recurring Revenue
Provision of Managed Services to the customer. All of 
the revenue in this category is contracted and includes 
a full range of managed support, maintenance, license 
subscription, and service agreements. 
Performance obligations are identified for each distinct 
service for which the customer has contracted and are 
considered to be satisfied over the time period that 
these services are delivered.
Revenue for these types of services is 
recognised evenly over the period of the 
agreement as the services are provided.
Product Revenue
Provision of third-party hardware (e.g., phone handsets, 
routers) to the customer as a one-off, distinct sale.
Performance obligations are satisfied at the point in 
time that control passes to the customer.
Revenues for product sales are recognised 
in full in the Statement of Comprehensive 
Income upon delivery to the customer. 
Amongst other factors the Group has 
pricing, credit and fulfilment risk and as 
such is considered to be principal in these 
transactions.
Services Revenue 
Provision of professional services including consultancy 
services, and engineering services in respect of setups 
and installation of a customer managed service. 
Installation is typically intrinsically linked to the 
provision of the Managed Services (in recurring revenue 
above), so these services do not represent separate 
performance obligations and are therefore, combined 
with the associated service performance obligation. 
The Group also provides certain services that are 
non-complex and distinct from the provision of the 
underlying managed service contract. The completion 
of these services is a separate performance obligation.
Services revenue is recognised from the 
date of installation of a managed service 
and recognised evenly over the period of 
the agreement. 
For distinct separable services revenue 
is recognised at the point of completion 
of the performance obligation (e.g. upon 
delivery to the customer).
There are no material obligations in respect of returns, refunds or warranties.
The Group recognises revenue based on the stand-alone selling price of each performance obligation. Determining the 
selling price is typically driven by list prices. 
Payments received in advance of the revenue recognition point are recognised as deferred income within trade and other 
payables and amounts billed in arrears are accrued income within trade and other receivables. Revenue expected to be 
recognised in future periods for performance obligations that are not complete (or partially complete) as at 31 March 
2024 is £306m. This expectation is informed by existing customer contracts, and the expected term of services based on 
management’s expectation of anticipated renewal dates. Of this, £299m relates to revenue for recurring Managed Services. 
In comparison, revenue expected to be recognised in future periods for performance obligations that were not complete 
(or partially complete) as at 31 March 2023 was £219m. Of this, £215m related to revenue for recurring Managed Services. 
30 days standard payment terms are offered to customers.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
1.5 Revenue recognition (continued) 
The Group pays commission to its sales teams for new 
contracts and renewals with the associated cost recognised 
over the life of the contract in accordance with IFRS15. 
Commission payments paid in advance are recognised 
as contract acquisition assets within trade and other 
receivables. Amortisation of the associated contract 
acquisition asset is recognised within operating costs 
within the Statement of Comprehensive Income.
Incremental revenues are generated based on usage for 
calls and data. Some managed service contracts contain 
an element of usage-based charges, and customers may 
request additional services or changes in scope, both 
resulting in additional charges. Usage-based charges are 
typically billed in arrears, in the period subsequent to which 
the usage takes place, and revenue is therefore accrued 
in the month which usage takes place. For changes in scope 
or additional services, a new distinct contract is entered 
into, with revenue recognised as above. 
Also recognised in product revenue are a small number 
of sales recognised under bill and hold arrangements. 
The Group have applied the criteria defined in IFRS 15, 
in particular: the reason for the bill-and-hold arrangement 
is substantive, the product can be identified separately as 
belonging to the customer; the product is ready for physical 
transfer to the customer; and the Group cannot use the 
product of direct it to another customer.
1.6 Exceptional items
Exceptional items are items of income and expense 
which are material and, due to their nature or expected 
infrequency of the events giving rise to them, are presented 
separately on the face of the Statement of Comprehensive 
Income in order to provide a further understanding of 
the Group’s financial performance. Exceptional items 
are excluded from the Group’s alternative performance 
measures (APMs), as defined on pages 22-25, and are 
disclosed in detail in Note 9. Amounts included in 
exceptional items may also represent true ups presented 
as exceptional in prior periods.
1.7 Share-based payments
Equity-settled transactions
The cost of equity-settled transactions with employees 
is measured by reference to the fair value of the award at 
the date at which they are granted and is recognised as an 
expense over the vesting period, which ends on the date at 
which the relevant employees become fully entitled to the 
award. Fair value is determined by an external valuer using 
an appropriate pricing model for which the assumptions 
are approved by the Directors. In valuing equity-settled 
transactions, only vesting conditions linked to the market 
price of the shares of the Company are considered.
No expense is recognised for awards that do not ultimately 
vest, except for awards where vesting is conditional upon a 
market condition, which are treated as vesting irrespective 
of whether or not the market condition is satisfied, provided 
that all other performance conditions are satisfied.
At each balance sheet date before vesting, the cumulative 
expense is calculated, representing the extent to which the 
vesting period has expired and management’s best estimate 
of the achievement or otherwise of non-market conditions, 
number of equity instruments that will ultimately vest or in 
the case of an instrument subject to a market condition, be 
treated as vesting described above. The movement in the 
cumulative expense since the previous balance sheet date 
is recognised in the Statement of Comprehensive Income, 
with a corresponding entry in equity.
Where the terms of an equity-settled award are modified 
or a new award is designated as replacing a cancelled 
or settled award, the existing charge is recognised 
immediately. In addition, an expense is recognised over the 
remainder of the new vesting period for the incremental fair 
value of any modification, based on the difference between 
the fair value of the original award and the fair value of 
the modified award, both as measured on the date of the 
modification. No reduction is recognised if this difference  
is negative.
Where an equity-settled award is cancelled, it is treated as 
if it had vested on the date of cancellation, and any expense 
not yet recognised for the award is recognised immediately. 
Any compensation paid up to the fair value of the award at 
the cancellation or settlement date is deducted from equity, 
with any excess over fair value being treated as an expense 
in the Statement of Comprehensive Income.
In respect of equity-settled transactions with employees, 
Redcentric plc grants rights to its equity instruments to 
employees of the Group. The Group’s subsidiaries are the 
receiving entities for such arrangements as they receive the 
related services from employees, however such awards are 
ultimately settled by Redcentric plc as the parent Company. 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
90
91
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

1.8 Taxation
The taxation expense charged in the Consolidated 
Statement of Comprehensive Income represents the sum of 
the current tax expense and the deferred tax expense.
The current tax payable is based on the taxable profit for 
the year. Taxable profit differs from accounting profit as 
reported in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive 
Income because it excludes items of income or expense 
that are taxable or deductible in other years and it further 
excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. The 
Group liability for current tax is measured using tax rates 
that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the 
balance sheet date.
Deferred tax is the tax expected to be payable or 
recoverable on differences between the carrying amount 
of assets and liabilities in the Financial Statements and the 
corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable 
profit and is accounted for using the balance sheet liability 
method. Deferred tax is provided for on all temporary 
differences at the balance sheet date between the tax 
bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts for 
financial reporting purposes, with the following exceptions:
•	
where the temporary difference arises from the initial 
recognition of goodwill or an asset or liability in a 
transaction that is not a business combination that at 
the time of the transaction affects neither accounting 
nor taxable profit or loss;
•	
in respect of taxable temporary differences associated 
with investments in subsidiaries, where the timing 
of the reversal of the temporary differences can be 
controlled and it is probable that the temporary 
differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future; 
and
•	
deferred income tax assets are recognised only to 
the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will 
be available against which deductible temporary 
differences carried forward tax credits or tax losses can 
be utilised. 
The carrying amount of deferred tax assets is reviewed 
at each reporting date and reduced to the extent that it 
is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profit will be 
available to allow all or part of the deferred tax asset to be 
utilised. Unrecognised deferred tax assets are re-assessed 
at each reporting date and are recognised to the extent that 
it has become probable that future taxable profits will allow 
the deferred tax asset to be recovered. 
In assessing the recoverability of deferred tax assets, 
the Group relies on the same forecast assumptions 
used elsewhere in the Financial Statements and in other 
management reports, which, among other things, reflect 
the potential impact of climate-related development on  
the business. 
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax 
rates that are expected to apply when the related asset is 
realised or the liability is settled, based on tax rates and tax 
laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the 
reporting date. 
Deferred tax is charged or credited in the Consolidated 
Statement of Comprehensive Income, except where the 
underlying transaction relates directly to equity.
The Group offsets deferred tax assets and deferred tax 
liabilities if and only if it has a legally enforceable right to 
set off current tax assets and current tax liabilities and the 
deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities relate to 
income taxes levied by the same taxation authority and the 
Group intends to settle current tax liabilities and assets on 
a net basis. 
1.9 Foreign currencies
The functional and presentation currency of Redcentric plc 
is Pound Sterling (£) and the Group conducts the majority 
of its business in Sterling. Transactions in foreign currencies 
are initially recorded in the functional currency by applying 
the rate of exchange ruling at the date of the transaction. 
Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign 
currencies are retranslated at the functional currency 
rate of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date. All 
differences are taken to the Statement of Comprehensive 
Income, except for differences on monetary assets and 
liabilities that form part of the Group’s net investment in a 
foreign operation. These are taken directly to equity until 
the disposal of the net investment, at which time they are 
recognised in profit or loss.
1.10 Pensions
The Group operates a defined contribution scheme. 
Pension costs are charged directly to the Statement of 
Comprehensive Income in the period to which they relate 
on an accrual’s basis. The Group has no further payment 
obligations once contributions have been paid.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
1.11 Business combinations
Business combinations are accounted for by applying the 
acquisition method at the accounting date, which is the 
date on which control is transferred to the Group. The 
Group controls an entity when the Group is exposed to, or 
has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the 
entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its 
power over the entity.
The consideration transferred for the acquisition of a 
subsidiary is the fair value of the assets transferred, the 
liabilities incurred, and the equity interests issued by the 
Group. The consideration transferred includes the fair 
value of any asset or liability resulting from a contingent 
consideration arrangement. Acquisition-related costs are 
expensed as incurred. Identifiable assets acquired and 
liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a business 
combination are measured initially at their fair value at the 
acquisition date. The Group recognises any non-controlling 
interest in the acquiree on an acquisition-by-acquisition 
basis, either at fair value or at the non-controlling interest’s 
proportionate share of the acquiree’s net assets.
The excess of the consideration transferred and the amount 
of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree over the 
fair value of the separable identifiable net assets acquired 
and liabilities incurred or assumed at the acquisition date 
is recorded as purchased goodwill. Provision is made for 
any impairment. Accounting policies previously applied by 
acquired subsidiaries are changed as necessary to comply 
with accounting policies adopted by the Group.
Where an acquisition involves a potential payment of 
contingent consideration the cost is estimated based on 
its acquisition date fair value and is included as part of the 
consideration transferred in a business combination. To 
estimate the fair value an assessment is made as to the 
amount of additional consideration that is likely to be paid 
with reference to the associated criteria. Where a change is 
made to the fair value of contingent consideration within the 
initial measurement period as a result of new or additional 
information that existed at the acquisition date the change 
is accounted for as a retrospective adjustment to goodwill. 
Any change as a result of events that occurred after the 
acquisition date then the adjustment is accounted for as 
a charge or credit to profit or loss. Measurement period 
adjustments are adjustments that arise from additional 
information obtained during the ‘measurement period’ (which 
cannot exceed one year from the acquisition date) about 
facts and circumstances that existed at the acquisition date.
Costs related to acquisitions, other than those associated 
with the issue of debt or equity securities, are expensed as 
incurred. 
1.12 Subsidiaries
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group.  
The Financial Statements of subsidiaries are included in 
the Consolidated Financial Statements from the date that 
control is established to the date control ceases.
Control is achieved where the acquiring Company has 
the power to govern the financial and operating policies 
of an investee entity therefore obtaining benefits from 
its activities. Intercompany transactions and outstanding 
balances are eliminated on consolidation.
For the year ended 31 March 2024 the following companies 
are exempt from audit under s479A of the Companies Act 
2006 (the Act) as Redcentric plc will provide a guarantee 
under s479C of the Act and their results are included in its 
Consolidated Financial Statements.
•	
Piksel Industry Solutions Limited (03048367)
•	
7 Elements Limited (SC382475)
•	
4D Data Centres Limited (04592242)
1.13 Intangible assets
a) Goodwill
Goodwill arises on the acquisition of subsidiaries and 
represents the excess of the consideration transferred, the 
amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree and 
the acquisition-date fair value of any previous equity interest 
in the acquiree over the fair value of the identifiable net 
assets acquired. If the total of consideration transferred, 
non-controlling interest recognised and previously held 
interest measured at fair value is less than the fair value 
of the net asset of the subsidiary, in the case of a bargain 
purchase, the difference is recognised directly to the 
Statement of Comprehensive Income. 
For the purposes of impairment testing, goodwill acquired 
in a business combination is allocated to each of the 
cash-generating units (CGUs), or groups of CGUs, that is 
expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination. 
Each unit or group of units to which the goodwill is allocated 
represents the lowest level within the entity at which the 
goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes. 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
92
93
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

1.13 Intangible assets (continued)
a) Goodwill (continued)
Goodwill is reviewed for impairment annually or more 
frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate 
that the carrying value may be impaired. As at the 
acquisition date any goodwill acquired is allocated to 
each of the CGUs expected to benefit from the business 
combination’s synergies. Impairment is determined by 
assessing the recoverable amount, which is the higher of 
value in use and the fair value less costs of disposal, of the 
CGU to which the goodwill relates. When the recoverable 
amount of the CGU is less than the carrying amount, an 
impairment loss is recognised.
b) Other intangible assets
Other intangible assets are carried at cost less accumulated 
amortisation and impairment losses.
An intangible asset acquired as part of a business 
combination is recognised outside goodwill if the asset is 
separable or arises from contractual or other legal rights 
and its fair value can be measured reliably.
Customer relationships acquired as part of a business 
combination are capitalised at fair value at the date of 
acquisition and amortised on a straight-line basis over the 
estimated useful life of the customer relationship. An annual 
impairment review is undertaken in line with that of goodwill 
noted above. 
Intangible assets with a finite life are amortised on a 
straight-line basis over their expected useful lives, as 
follows:
Customer contracts and 	
5 – 15 years 
related relationships
Trademarks and brands 	
5 years
Software and licences 	
5 years (or over the contract 	
	
term if shorter)
Impairment and amortisation charges are included within 
operating expenditure in the Statement of Comprehensive 
Income.
c) Internally generated intangibles
Expenditure on software development is capitalised as an 
intangible asset only if it meets the recognition criteria set 
out in IAS 38 Intangible Assets, requiring it to be probable 
that the expenditure will generate future economic benefits 
and can be measured reliably. To meet these criteria, it is 
necessary to be able to demonstrate, among other things, 
the technical feasibility of completing the intangible asset 
so that it will be available for use or sale.
Development expenditure directed towards incremental 
improvements in existing products, remedial work and other 
maintenance activity does not qualify for recognition as an 
intangible asset.
1.14 Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less 
accumulated depreciation and any impairment in value. 
The cost includes the original price of the asset and the 
cost attributable to bringing the asset to its current working 
condition for its intended use. 
Depreciation, down to residual value, is calculated on a 
straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of the asset 
which is reviewed on an annual basis. 
Office fixtures and fittings	
5 years
Leasehold improvements 	
15 years (or over the 	
	
lease term if shorter)
Vehicles and computer equipment	 3 – 5 years (or over the 	
	
contract term if shorter)
For property, plant and equipment funded through leases, 
where there is reasonable certainty that the Group obtains 
ownership by the end of the lease term, depreciation 
is provided on a straight-line basis over the useful life, 
otherwise it’s provided over the shorter of the useful life 
and the lease term.
Assets under construction are recognised at cost. 
Depreciation commences when the asset is ready for 
intended use.
An item of property, plant and equipment is de-recognised 
upon disposal or when no future economic benefits are 
expected to arise from the continued use of the asset. 
Any gain or loss arising on de-recognition of the asset 
(calculated as the difference between the net disposal 
proceeds and the carrying amount of the item) is included in 
the Statement of Comprehensive Income in the period the 
item is de-recognised.
In reviewing the value of property, plant and equipment, 
consideration for any impacts of climate-related risks to  
fair values or the useful economic lives of assets is deemed 
not material. 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
1.15 Impairment of property, plant and equipment, right-
of-use assets and intangible assets excluding goodwill
Other intangible assets, property, plant and equipment  
and right-of-use assets are reviewed for impairment 
whenever events arise or changes in circumstances  
indicate the carrying values may not be recoverable.  
If any such indication exists and where the carrying  
amounts exceed the estimated recoverable amount, the 
assets or cash generating units are written down to their 
recoverable amount.
The recoverable amount of intangible assets, property, 
plant and equipment and right-of-use assets is the greater 
of fair value less costs to sell and value in use. In assessing 
value in use, the estimated future cash flows are discounted 
to their present value using a pre-tax discount rate that 
reflects current market assessments of the time value of 
money and the risks specific to the asset. For an asset that 
does not generate largely independent cash inflows, the 
recoverable amount is determined by the cash generating 
unit to which the asset belongs. Fair value less costs to sell 
is, where known, based on actual sales price net of costs 
incurred in completing the disposal.
Non-financial assets that were impaired in the previous 
periods are annually reviewed to assess whether the 
impairment is still relevant. 
Whilst the Group is committed to net zero and 
acknowledges there will be future cash outflows  
associated with achieving this, there is no expectation  
that it will materially impact the carrying value of its asset 
base, particularly given the relative short-term useful 
economic lives.
1.16 Inventories and cost of sales
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net  
realisable value. Cost corresponds to purchase cost 
determined by the first in first out (FIFO) method. Provision 
is made, where necessary, for slow-moving, obsolete and 
defective inventories.
1.17 Leases
IFRS 16 has introduced a single on-balance sheet accounting 
model for lessees. When entering into a new contract, the 
Group assesses whether it is, or contains, a lease. A lease 
conveys a right to control the use of an identified asset for a 
period of time in exchange for consideration. 
The Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease 
liability at the lease commencement date. The right-of-use 
asset is initially measured at cost, and subsequently at cost 
less any accumulated depreciation and impairment losses, 
adjusted for certain remeasurements of the lease liability. 
Depreciation is provided on a straight-line basis over the life 
of the lease, or the useful economic life if that is shorter.
Cost of the right-of-use asset consists of the initial lease 
liability plus any lease payments made to the lessor 
before the commencement date (less any lease incentives 
received), plus the initial estimate of restoration costs and 
any initial direct costs incurred by the lessee. 
Obligations to restore the underlying asset to the  
condition required by the terms and conditions of the  
lease are recognised and measured under IAS 37  
Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets, 
and a corresponding asset included in the related right-of-
use asset. Dilapidation provisions are discounted to  
present value at the year end and subsequent unwinding  
of the discounting is recorded in the Statement of 
Comprehensive Income.
The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of 
the lease payments that are not paid at the commencement 
date and discounted using the interest rate implicit in the 
lease or, more typically, the Group’s incremental borrowing 
rate (when the implicit rate cannot be readily determined).
The lease liability is subsequently increased by the interest 
cost on the lease liability and decreased by lease payments 
made. It is remeasured when there is a change in future 
lease payments arising from a change in an index or rate,  
or changes in the Group’s assessment of whether a 
purchase, extension or termination option is reasonably 
certain to be exercised.
The Group adopts recognition exemptions for short-term 
(less than 12 months) on property and low value on a lease-
by-lease basis. The Group classifies payments of lease 
liabilities (principal and interest portions) as part of financing 
activities. Payments of short-term, low value and variable 
lease components are classified within operating activities.
Asset financing
Where the Group finances assets using the Asset Financing 
Facility, the Group gives consideration as to whether a sale 
of the asset has taken place under IFRS 15, and therefore 
whether a sale and leaseback transaction exists. Where a 
sale of the underlying asset is not deemed to have taken 
place, then the related asset is included within property, 
plant and equipment, with the corresponding liability 
reflected as an other financial liability within borrowings, 
measured in accordance with IFRS 9.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
94
95
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

1.18 Financial instruments 
a) Financial assets
The Group classifies its financial assets as loans and 
receivables measured at amortised cost.
Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets 
with fixed or determinable payments which are not quoted 
in an active market. They are included in current assets, 
except for maturities greater than 12 months after the 
balance sheet date which are classified as non-current 
assets. The Group’s loans and receivables comprise ‘trade 
and other receivables’, ‘cash and cash equivalents’, and 
‘other receivables’ which are expected to be settled in cash.
Trade receivables
Trade receivables are amounts due from customers for 
goods sold and services provided in the ordinary course of 
business. Trade receivables are recognised initially at fair 
value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using 
the effective interest method, less provision for impairment.
In recognising any provision for impairment, the Group 
applies the IFRS 9 approach to measuring expected credit 
losses which uses a lifetime expected loss allowance for 
all assets held at amortised cost. The Group recognises 
a loss allowance for all expected credit losses on initial 
recognition using an allowance matrix to measure the 
expected credit losses of trade receivables from individual 
and corporate customers. Loss rates are calculated using a 
‘roll rate’ method based on the probability of a receivable 
progressing through successive stages of delinquency to 
write-off. Given the similar characteristics of the product 
and service types, geographic region and type of customer 
relationship, all customers in each ageing bracket have had 
the same rate applied.
The Group’s trade and other receivables are non-interest 
bearing.
Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents on the Statement of Financial 
Position comprise cash at bank and in hand and short-term 
deposits with an original maturity of three months or less.
b) Financial liabilities
Trade payables
Trade payables are stated at their nominal value,  
recognised initially at fair value and subsequently  
valued at amortised cost.
Provisions
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present 
obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event, 
it is probable that an outflow of resources embodying 
economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation, 
and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of  
the obligation.
If the effect of the time value of money is material, 
provisions are determined by discounting the expected 
future cash flows at a pre-tax rate that reflects current 
market assessments of the time value of money and, where 
appropriate, the risks specific to the liability. 
Interest-bearing loans and borrowings
All loans and borrowings are initially recognised at fair 
value less directly attributable transaction costs. After 
initial recognition, interest-bearing loans and borrowings 
are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the 
effective interest method. Gains and losses arising on 
the repurchase, settlement or otherwise cancellation of 
liabilities are recognised in the finance cost line in the 
Statement of Comprehensive Income.
Loans are carried at fair value of initial recognition, net of 
unamortised issue costs of debt. These costs are amortised 
over the loan term.
1.19 Dividends
Dividends payable to equity shareholders are included in 
the Financial Statements within ‘other creditors’ when a final 
dividend is approved by shareholders in a general meeting. 
Interim dividends to equity shareholders approved by 
the Board during the financial year are not included in the 
Financial Statements until paid.
1.20 Research and development costs
Expenditure on research activities is recognised in the 
Statement of Comprehensive Income as an expense 
as incurred. Expenditure on development activities is 
capitalised as “development costs” if the product or 
process is technically and commercially feasible, if the 
Group has the technical ability and sufficient resources 
to complete development, if future economic benefits 
are probable and if the Group can measure reliably the 
expenditure attributable to the intangible asset during 
its development. Development activities involve a plan or 
design for the production of new or substantially improved 
products or processes.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
1.21 Allocation of costs
Cost of sales are those costs which are directly attributable 
to the business in order to generate revenue, which includes 
costs of hardware and software sold to customers, freight 
and delivery, reseller commissions and set-up costs. 
Operating costs are all other expenses relating to the 
underlying business, which includes staff costs, legal and 
professional fees, office costs, amortisation of contract 
acquisition assets, marketing and advertising. 
2 Critical accounting judgements, key 
sources of estimation uncertainty and other 
areas of estimation
In the application of the Group’s accounting policies, 
which are described in Note 1, the Board are required to 
make judgements, estimates and assumptions about the 
carrying amounts of assets and liabilities, without clear 
direction from other sources. The estimates and associated 
assumptions are based on historical experience and other 
factors that are considered to be relevant. Actual results 
may differ from these estimates. 
The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed 
on an ongoing basis and are consistent with the Group’s 
risk management and climate-related commitments 
where appropriate. Revisions to accounting estimates are 
recognised in the period in which the estimate is revised 
if the revision only affects that period, or in the period of 
the revision and future periods if the revision affects both 
current and future periods. 
Judgements
The Group has identified the following items as a critical 
accounting judgement which would have a significant 
impact to the amounts recognised in the Financial 
Statements for the year ended 31 March 2024.
Exceptionals items
The Group presents separately, on the face of the 
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, 
material items of income and expenses, which, because 
of their nature and expected infrequency of events 
giving rise to them, merit separate presentation to allow 
shareholders to understand better the elements of the 
Company’s underlying financial performance. An element 
of management judgment is required in identifying these 
exceptional items. Additional information is included in 
Note 9.
Going concern
Management have prepared reports and financial models 
on the going concern assumptions when considering 
the FY24 results and the Group’s financial performance 
and compliance with banking covenants for a period 
of at least 12 months from the date of approval of the 
Financial Statements. In addition, internal financial 
projections including stress testing have been prepared, 
with management applying severe but plausible downside 
scenarios. An element of judgement is involved in 
determining that there is no material uncertainty over 
the Group continuing as a going concern. Additional 
information is included in Note 1.1.
Estimates
There are no major sources of estimation uncertainty at the 
end of the reporting period, that have a significant risk of 
resulting in a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of 
assets and liabilities within the next financial year. 
3 Financial risk management
The objectives of the Group’s treasury activities are to 
manage financial risk, secure cost-effective funding where 
necessary and minimise adverse effects of fluctuations in 
the financial markets on the value of the Group’s financial 
assets and liabilities, on reported profitability and on cash 
flows of the Group.
The Group’s principal financial instruments for fundraising 
are bank borrowings, overdraft facilities and loans. The 
Group has various other financial instruments such as cash, 
trade receivables and trade payables that arise directly from 
its operations.
The Group’s activities expose it to a variety of financial risks: 
market risk (including foreign exchange, cash flow interest 
rate risk, and price risk), credit risk, and liquidity risk. The 
Group’s overall risk management programme focuses 
on the unpredictability of financial markets and seeks to 
minimise potential adverse effects on the Group’s financial 
performance. Risk management is carried out centrally 
under policies approved by the Board of Directors. The 
Board provides principles for overall risk management, as 
well as policies covering each specific risk area.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
96
97
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

3 Financial risk management (continued)
a) Foreign exchange risk
The Group mainly operates within the UK with foreign 
exchange risk arising from certain transactions with 
counterparties denominated in foreign currencies. This is 
not a significant risk for the Group. 
b) Cash flow interest rate risk
The Group receives interest on cash and cash equivalents 
and pays interest on its borrowings. Borrowings at variable 
rates expose the Group to cash flow interest rate risk. 
During the year the Group’s borrowings at variable rate 
were denominated in Pounds Sterling with interest linked to 
Sterling interest rates.
The Group analyses its interest rate exposure on a 
dynamic basis. Various scenarios are simulated taking into 
consideration refinancing, renewal of existing positions, 
alternative financing and hedging. Based on these 
scenarios, the Group calculates the impact on profit or loss 
of a defined interest rate shift and manages its cash flow 
interest rate risk accordingly. 
Based on the simulations performed, the impact on post-tax 
profit and equity of a +/– 1% shift in the interest rate would 
not be material. The simulation is done on a quarterly basis 
to verify that the maximum loss potential is within the limit 
given by management.
c) Price risk
The Group is not exposed to significant commodity or 
security price risk. The Group has entered into contracts 
with energy brokers and has agreed own-use commodity 
prices for a significant proportion of its expected electricity 
volumes, which significantly reduces its exposure to  
price volatility. 
d) Credit risk
Credit risk arises from cash and cash equivalents, as well 
as credit exposures to customers. Individual risk limits are 
set based on internal and external ratings and reviewed by 
the Board where appropriate. The utilisation of credit limits 
is regularly monitored with appropriate action taken by 
management in the event of a breach of credit limit.
Liquidity risk
Management monitors rolling forecasts of the Group’s 
undrawn borrowing facility and cash and cash equivalents 
based on expected cash flow. The Group’s liquidity 
management policy involves projecting cash flows and 
considering the level of liquid assets necessary to meet these.
4 Capital risk management
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to 
safeguard the Group’s future growth and its ability to 
continue as a going concern in order to provide returns for 
shareholders and to maintain an optimal capital structure to 
reduce the cost of capital. 
In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure the 
Group has previously both issued new shares and borrowed 
using bank facilities. The Group monitors capital on the 
basis of the ratio of net bank debt to adjusted EBITDA. 
Net debt is calculated as total bank borrowings (including 
‘current and non-current borrowings’ as shown in the 
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position) less cash 
and cash equivalents, and adjusted EBITDA is defined as 
earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation, 
exceptional costs and share-based payments. The Group’s 
strategy is to maintain the ongoing ratio at below 2.5x. The 
ratio was below this level throughout the year, and at 31 
March 2024 was 2.3x (31 March 2023: 1.8x). 
The bank facilities referred to in Note 24 contain various 
covenants relating to EBITDA, interest cover, net debt and 
cash flow, which the Group monitors on a monthly basis. 
The Group adopts a risk-averse position with respect to 
borrowings and maintains headroom in its bank facilities 
to ensure that any unexpected situations do not create 
financial stress. Refer to Note 1.1. 
5 Segment reporting
IFRS 8 requires operating segments to be identified based 
on internal financial information reported to the chief 
operating decision-maker (CODM) for decision-making 
purposes. The Group considers that this role is performed 
by the main Board. The Board believes that the Group 
continues to comprise a single reporting segment, being 
the provision of Managed Services to customers. The 
CODM assesses profit performance principally through an 
adjusted EBITDA measure, as defined on page 23.
Whilst the Board reviews the Group’s three revenue streams 
separately (recurring, product and service), the operating 
costs and operating asset base used to derive these 
revenue streams are the same for all three categories and 
are presented as such in the Group’s internal reporting to 
the CODM.
Non-current assets held outside the UK are immaterial 
(31 March 2023: immaterial).
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
6 Revenue
Revenue for the year ended 31 March 2024 was generated wholly from the UK and is analysed as follows:
Year ended 
31 March 
2024 
£000
Year ended 
 31 March 
2023 
£000
Recurring revenue
149,091
128,461
Product revenue
5,507
7,144
Services revenue
8,552
6,069
Total revenue
163,150
141,674
Revenue is analysed into the following categories:
•	
Recurring revenue, which was higher at £149.1m (FY23: £128.5m). 
•	
Non-recurring product revenue, which was lower at £5.5m (FY23: £7.1m).
•	
Non-recurring services revenue, which was higher at £8.6m (FY23: £6.1m).
The year-on-year increases noted in recurring revenue and non-recurring service revenue are in part attributable to the full 
year impact of prior year acquisitions (see Note 32) coupled with organic growth in the existing business. The reduction in 
non-recurring product revenue is attributable to reduced projects in FY24 with the focus being on higher margin services 
revenues.
6.1 Contract balances
The following table provides information about receivables, contract assets and contract liabilities from contracts with 
customers:
Year ended 
31 March 
2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 
2023 
£000
Receivables, included in trade and other receivables, net of provisions (Note 21)
18,190
20,205
Accrued income, included in trade and other receivables (Note 20)
5,194
4,568
Deferred income, included in trade and other payables (Note 22)
(9,983)
(8,331)
There were no material impairment losses recorded during the year or the prior year. 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
98
99
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

7 Operating profit
The following costs/(income) are considered to be significant items within operating profit:
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000
Amortisation of acquired intangible assets
5,229
8,183
Amortisation of intangible assets: owned
736
590
Amortisation of intangible assets: financed
45
-
Depreciation: owned assets
6,000
4,636
Depreciation: financed
89
-
Depreciation of right-of-use assets: leased
11,777
10,617
Share-based payments and associated National Insurance
1,138
1,256
Net foreign exchange losses
86
11
Employee benefits expense, excluding share-based compensation 
37,261
33,223
Gain on settlement of contingent consideration (Note 9)
(2,100)
-
Exceptional costs (Note 9)
4,550
8,149
Other operating income is broken down as follows:
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000
Income from Transition Service Agreement 
-
88
8 Auditor’s remuneration
Total fees payable by the Group during the year to KPMG LLP in respect of the audit and other services provided were 
as follows:
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000
Audit of these Financial Statements
50
45
Audit of subsidiaries (including overseas subsidiaries)
421
364
Additional audit fees in relation to business combinations audit work 
-
100
Total audit
471
509
Other non-audit services not covered above
14
1
Total non-audit services
14
1
Total fees
485
510
£0.1m of additional audit fees were agreed in FY24 in respect of the FY23 Financial Statements audit. This amount is not 
reflected in the table above.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
9 Exceptional items
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000
Included within operating costs:
Acquisition related professional and legal fees 
350
695
Integration costs 
3,467 
5,965
Restructuring costs
733
-
Costs relating to the settlement of a historical supplier dispute
-
809
Cloud computing costs
-
680
Total exceptional costs
4,550
8,149
Presented separately in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income:
Gain on settlement of contingent consideration
(2,100)
-
Total exceptional income
(2,100)
-
Current year
Exceptional costs
Acquisition related professional and legal fees of £0.4m (FY23: £0.7m) are for professional services linked to the significant 
acquisitions of certain business and assets relating to three data centres from Sungard Availability Services (UK) Limited 
(“Sungard”), the consulting business from Sungard and 100% of the issued share capital of 4D Data Centres Limited during 
the previous year. These costs, though incurred in FY24, relate to the acquisition projects and include valuation services 
in respect of establishing the fair value of acquired assets and other associated professional fees. Cash costs were £0.4m 
(FY23: £0.7m).
Integration costs of £3.5m (FY23: £6.0m) principally relate to the exit of the Harrogate data centre and relocation of both 
customer and internal platforms to our West Yorkshire data centre in Elland, which accounted for £2.6m of the integration 
costs. This activity was intrinsically linked to the integration of the Sungard and 4D Data Centre acquisitions, which left the 
Group with significant data centre capacity that required consolidation. Following a period of assessment of which data 
centres would best serve the Group going forward, it was determined the Harrogate data centre and adjoining office space 
would be exited at the end of the current lease on the 24 March 2024. 
The relocation of the Harrogate data centre was a significant undertaking for the Group, involving dedicated resource for 
up to 12 months, including staff that were seconded to the project, and diverted away from other value-adding activities, 
for most or all of their time before returning to their existing roles following the project’s completion. It is expected that 
£0.7m of cost allocated to integration costs in FY24 in respect of this move relates to staff costs which would have been 
included within adjusted operating profit in the prior year. In total, £1.4m of third-party expenditure across contract resource 
and other directly associated spend and £1.2m of staff salaries, bonuses and associated taxes were spent on the move to 
migrate activities to the West Yorkshire data centre. In addition, £1.0m of cost was incurred to restore the Harrogate site 
to its original condition following the customer migration. These costs, where they relate to restoration and dilapidations 
activity, are shown as a utilisation of the existing dilapidations provision for this site (Note 26).
The remaining £0.9m of integration costs presented within exceptional costs include £0.7m incurred to decommission 
presences in two third-party data centres inherited from acquisitions as part of the ongoing strategy to consolidate the 
estate and £0.2m related to staff costs performing other integration work to migrate legacy platforms.
Cash costs relating to exceptional integration costs in the year were £3.1m (FY23: £6.0m).
Restructuring costs include £0.5m of staff costs associated with a management restructure for staff who have subsequently 
left the business, and £0.2m of related legal fees. Cash costs were also £0.7m.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
100
101
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

9 Exceptional items (continued)
Exceptional income
During FY24, the consideration for the Sungard acquisition was finalised.  £2.5m of contingent consideration was recognised 
as a liability in the prior year based on the expectations at prior year balance sheet date. The final position has now been 
crystallised on the anniversary of date of the acquisition, in line with the purchase agreement. During FY24, the final 
settlement totalled £0.4m, and therefore an exceptional £2.1m credit has been recognised as a gain on settlement of 
contingent consideration in line with the prior year subsequent events disclosure. This is presented separately on the face of 
the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income.
Prior year
Exceptional costs
Acquisition related professional and legal fees of £0.7m in FY23 were for professional services linked to the three 
acquisitions in the prior year, as explained above. Cash costs were £0.7m.
The integration costs in FY23 relate to costs incurred in integrating the three businesses (Sungard data centres, Sungard 
Consulting and 4D Data Centres) into the Group during FY23 and include costs relating to the TSA (Transition Service 
Agreement) (£1.4m), migrating customers (£1.2m) and employee restructuring relating to employees who had subsequently 
left the business (£3.3m). There was also £0.1m of professional fees directly relating to the incremental financial statement 
audit procedures completed on the acquisition accounting.
In the prior year, costs relating to the settlement of a historical supplier dispute totalled £0.6m for the crystallisation of the 
settlement and £0.2m charged by the Group’s legal advisors in respect of this matter. Cash costs were £0.8m.
Cloud computing costs of £0.7m in the prior year related to expenditure to achieve the original implementation scope of 
the Group’s major ERP implementation programme, and the continued remediation of the Group’s ERP system (Microsoft 
Dynamics 365) to resolve a number of implementation related process and system deficiencies that required correcting post 
initial implementation. Cash costs were £0.7m. 
10 Finance costs
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000
Finance costs
Interest payable on bank loans, term loans and asset financing
3,604
1,827
Interest payable on leases 
1,328
1,218
Amortisation of loan arrangement fees
209
291
Other interest payable
361
194
5,502
3,530
Interest payable on leases includes £1.3m (FY23: £1.2m) of interest on leases previously classified as operating leases  
under IAS17.
Other interest payable relates to interest on contingent consideration and dilapidation provisions. 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
11 Employees
The average monthly number of people (including Executive Directors) employed by the Group during the year was  
as follows:
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000
Operations
483
429
Selling and distribution
91
83
Administration
85
76
659
588
Employee costs were:
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000
Wages and salaries
31,901
27,978
Social security costs
3,497
3,251
Share-based payments and associated National Insurance
1,138
1,257
Pension costs
1,387
1,263
Payments in lieu of notice and redundancy not included within exceptional items
54
277
Payments in lieu of notice and redundancy included within exceptional items
422
453
38,399
34,479
The payments in lieu of notice and redundancy included within exceptional items are within the integration related costs. 
11.1 Key management compensation
Key management personnel are those persons having authority and responsibility for planning, controlling and directing 
the activities of the entity either directly, or indirectly. The following table details the compensation of key management 
personnel, being senior management that sit on the Operating Board of the Group along with executive and  
Non-Executive Directors.
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000
Basic salary, allowances, fees and other employment expenses
1,717
1,667
Bonus and other benefits
271
123
Share-based payments charge
678
601
Pension costs
104
91
2,770
2,482
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
102
103
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

11 Employees (continued)
11.2 Directors’ remuneration
The remuneration of the Directors in respect of the year was as follows:
Basic Salary, 
allowances, 
and fees
Bonus
Pension
Share-
based 
payments 
FY24 
Total
FY23 
Total
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
Executive 
Peter Brotherton
382
114
43
-
539
831
David Senior 
215
74
11
-
300
339
Non-Executive
Alan Aubrey 
50
-
-
-
50
38
Jon Kempster (resigned 21 July 2022)
-
-
-
-
-
25
Nick Bate 
85
-
-
-
85
85
Helena Feltham (resigned 24 July 2023)
16
-
-
-
16
50
Oliver Scott (appointed 1 December 2023) 
8
-
-
-
8
-
Michelle Senecal De Fonseca (appointed  
13 February 2024)
7
-
-
-
7
-
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
Multiple 
UK-based Tier 3 
designed data 
centres
Own 100GB 
network
Voice & IaaS 
platforms
24/7 network 
& security 
operations 
centre
Offices 
throughout  
the UK
UK-based 
support team
We offer end-to-end management, total control, accountability 
and a single point of contact for our solutions delivered across our 
own network, platforms and data centres.
11 Employees (continued)
11.2 Directors’ remuneration (continued)
Details of share options in the Company held by the Directors during the year are as follows (audited):
Exercise 
price (p)
Balance, 
31 March 2023 
(number)
Granted 
(number)
Cancelled 
/ lapsed 
(number)
Balance, 
31 March 2024 
(number)
Peter Brotherton 
(a)
0.1
242,915
-
(242,915)
-
(b)
0.1
554,326
-
-
554,326
(c)
99.9
18,023
-
-
18,023
(e)
0.1
621,250
-
-
621,250
(f)
0.1
-
605,620
-
605,620
1,436,514
605,620
(242,915)
1,799,219
David Senior
(a)
0.1
129,555
-
(129,555)
-
(b)
0.1
312,296
-
-
312,296
(d)
96.1
18,736
-
-
18,736
(e)
0.1
333,334
-
-
333,334
(f)
0.1
-
347,030 
-
347,030 
793,921
347,030 
(129,555)
1,011,396
(a) These options were granted on 8 December 2020 under the Company’s Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”). These options failed to vest 
following the publication of the Company’s results for the year ended 31 March 2023 due to the vesting condition over Company share price 
growth not being met. 
(b) These options were granted on 18 November 2021 under the Company’s LTIP. The options will vest three years from grant subject to absolute 
Total Shareholder Return (TSR) Targets. For awards up to 100% of salary, 25% will vest for TSR of 5% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR 
of 10% p.a. For awards between 100% and 200% of salary, 0% will vest for TSR of 10% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 15% p.a. 
(c) These options were granted on 23 December 2021 under the HMRC-approved Save-As-You-Earn (“SAYE”) option plan under which employees 
contribute a monthly amount which is saved over three years to buy shares. The options are exercisable from 1 February 2025. There are no 
performance conditions. 
(d) These options were granted on 26 August 2022 under the HMRC-approved Save-As-You-Earn (“SAYE”) option plan under which employees 
contribute a monthly amount which is saved over three years to buy shares. The options are exercisable from 1 October 2025. There are no 
performance conditions.
(e) These options were granted on 12 October 2022 under the Company’s LTIP. The options will vest three years from grant subject to absolute Total 
Shareholder Return (TSR) Targets. For awards up to 100% of salary, 25% will vest for TSR of 5% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 10% 
p.a. For awards between 100% and 200% of salary, 0% will vest for TSR of 10% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 15% p.a. 
(f) These options were granted on 19 September 2023 under the Company’s LTIP. The options will vest three years from grant subject to absolute Total 
Shareholder Return (TSR) Targets. For awards up to 100% of salary, 25% will vest for TSR of 5% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 10% 
p.a. For awards between 100% and 200% of salary, 0% will vest for TSR of 10% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 15% p.a. 
On 4 March 2024 the executive Directors were awarded a cash-settled share-share based bonus scheme which will pay out 
in the event of a change of control within 12 months, subject to the discretion of the Remuneration Committee. A Stochastic 
model has been used to measure the fair value of this cash-settled share-based payment transaction. No expense has been 
recognised at the year end as the fair value of the scheme (£6k impact for FY24) is not considered material.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
104
105
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

12 Income tax credit
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000
Income tax
UK current year tax charge
167
108
Adjustment in respect of prior years
2
(7)
Total income tax
169
101
Deferred tax
Current year
(853)
(2,437)
Adjustment in respect of prior years
(525)
(31)
Effect of changes in tax rates
-
(852)
Total deferred tax
(1,378)
(3,320)
Total tax credit in Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive income
(1,209)
(3,219)
Other comprehensive income items
 
Deferred tax
-
47
 
Factors affecting the tax charge for the year
 Loss before taxation
(4,650)
(12,469)
Taxation at the average UK corporation tax rate of 25.0% (FY23: 19.0%)
(1,163)
(2,369)
Tax effects of:
-Expenses not allowable in determining taxable profit
647
430
-Adjustment in respect of prior years
(523)
(38)
-Non-taxable income
(238)
(239)
-Share options
129
(172)
-Tax rate changes
-
(503)
-Super deduction adjustment
-
(292)
-Amounts not recognised
-
(90)
-Effect of overseas tax rates
(61)
54
Tax credit for the year
(1,209)
(3,219)
An increase in the UK corporation rate from 19% to 25% (effective 1 April 2023) was substantively enacted on 24 May 2021. The deferred tax asset 
at 31 March 2024 has been calculated using the corporation tax rate of 25% (FY23: 25%).
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
13 Earnings per share (EPS)
The calculation of basic and diluted EPS is based on the following earnings and number of shares.
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000
Earnings
Statutory loss
(3,441)
(9,250)
Tax credit
(1,209)
(3,219)
Amortisation of acquired intangibles
5,229
8,183
Share-based payments
1,138
1,256
Exceptional costs
4,550
8,149
Exceptional income
(2,100)
-
Adjusted earnings before tax
4,167
5,119
Notional tax charge
(1,042)
(973)
Adjusted earnings
3,125
4,146
Weighted average number of ordinary shares
Number 
‘000
Number 
‘000 
In issue
157,371
156,992
Held in treasury
(693)
(1,391)
For basic EPS calculations
156,678
155,601
Effect of potentially dilutive share options 
5,129
3,678
For diluted EPS calculations
161,807
159,279
EPS
Pence
Pence 
Basic
(2.20p)
(5.94p)
Adjusted
1.99p
2.66p
Basic diluted
(2.20p)
(5.94p)
Adjusted diluted
1.93p
2.60p
In line with the Group’s policy, the notional tax charge above is calculated at a standard rate of 25% (FY23: 19%).
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
106
107
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

14 Dividends
Year ended 
31 March 2024 
£000
Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000
Final dividend for the year ended 31 March 2022
-
3,719
Interim dividend for the year ended 31 March 2023
-
1,874
Final dividend for the year ended 31 March 2023
3,752
-
3,752
5,593
The Group paid an interim dividend for the year ended 31 March 2023 of 1.2p per ordinary share, with a total payment value 
of £1.9m.
The Group paid a final dividend in respect of the year to 31 March 2023 of 2.4p per ordinary share, with a total payment 
value of £3.8m. This was made up of £1.4m cash with the remainder in dividend shares (see Note 27 for further details).
The Group paid an interim dividend for the year ended 31 March 2024 of 1.2p per ordinary share, with a total payment value 
of £1.9m. This was paid on 18 April 2024.
A final dividend payment of 2.4p per share is expected to be paid on 24 January 2025, subject to approval at the Company’s 
AGM, to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 13 December 2024 with shares going ex-dividend on 12 
December 2024. The last day for Dividend Reinvestment Plan elections is 2 January 2025.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
15 Intangible assets
Goodwill
Customer 
contracts 
and related 
relationships
Trademarks 
and brands 
Software 
and licences
Total
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
Cost
At 1 April 2022
52,416
65,030
449
5,570
123,465
Additions 
-
-
-
869
869
Additions on acquisition (Note 32)
8,224
15,100
200
-
23,524
Disposals
-
-
-
(135)
(135)
Exchange differences
-
-
-
(1)
(1)
At 31 March 2023
60,640
80,130
649
6,303
147,722
Additions
-
-
-
1,479
1,479
Disposals
-
-
-
(393)
(393)
Transfers from property, plant and equipment
-
-
-
261
261
At 31 March 2024
60,640
80,130
649
7,650
149,069
Accumulated amortisation and impairment
At 1 April 2022
-
50,893
449
4,397
55,739
Charged in year 
-
7,983
200
590
8,773
Disposals
-
-
-
(7)
(7)
At 31 March 2023
-
58,876
649
4,980
64,505
Charged in year
-
5,229
-
781
6,010
Disposals
-
-
-
(393)
(393)
Transfers from property, plant and equipment
-
-
-
64
64
At 31 March 2024
-
64,105
649
5,432
70,186
At 31 March 2024
60,640
16,025
-
2,218
78,883
At 31 March 2023
60,640
21,254
-
1,323
83,217
Amortisation of customer contracts has decreased by £2.8m to £5.2m in FY24. This is because one large customer contract 
was fully amortised at the end of FY23, while a second was fully amortised during FY24. 
Customer contracts have a weighted average remaining amortisation period of 8 years and 9 months (FY23: 8 years and 6 
months). There are no indicators of impairment at 31 March 2024.
Software and licences include £1.3m (FY23: £0.6m) of additions in relation to customer capital expenditure.
Included within software and licences is £0.5m (FY23: £nil) of assets financed under the Group’s Asset Financing Facility. The 
Directors have exercised judgement in determining that there has been no sale of these assets under IFRS15 and therefore 
the assets are financed rather than representing a sale and leaseback arrangement.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
The latest development on the IVR and call routing is 
the result of Redcentric listening to our requirements 
and developing to our needs. It’s key to our working 
relationship and why we value Redcentric.
“
”
109
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements
108

15 Intangible assets (continued) 
Goodwill has been allocated to one cash-generating unit (CGU) at 31 March 2024 whereas in the prior year goodwill was 
allocated to two CGUs being IT Managed Services and Security Services. During FY24 the Security Services business, 
being the 7 Elements acquisition, was further integrated into Redcentric infrastructure and operations. At the year end 
management no longer believe it capable of generating independent cash flows from the Group.
Goodwill is tested annually for impairment and, to confirm whether an impairment of the goodwill is necessary, management 
compares the carrying value to the value in use. Other intangible assets are tested for impairment whenever events or a 
change in circumstances indicate carrying values may no longer be recoverable. Consideration for any impacts of climate-
related risks to impairment is not deemed to affect the overall conclusions in the medium to long-term. 
The value in use has been calculated using a Board approved five-year forecast cash flow projections to the period of 
31 March 2029 comprising the detailed Group budget for FY25 and latest detailed forecast for FY26, with higher level 
assumptions applied for the outer years. A terminal value based on a perpetuity calculation using a 2.0% real growth rate 
was then added (FY23: 2.0% growth).
The key assumptions used in the impairment testing were as follows:
•	
New order intake consistent with that achieved in H2-FY24;
•	
Price increases in line with CPI;
•	
Overall gross margin percentage of c. 70% in line with historic trends;
•	
Electricity costs driven by near-term contracted prices and medium-term 3rd party price forecasts for energy;
•	
Operating costs (depending on nature) to increase in line with either revenue growth or CPI, factoring in any near-term 
licence inflation;
•	
Pre-tax discount rate of 10.87% (FY23: 11.2%) (post tax rate of 10.51% (FY23: 10.84%)) estimated using a weighted 
average cost of capital, adjusted to reflect current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific 
to the Group; and
•	
Terminal growth rate percentage is consistent with the market the entity operates in for real growth.
The Group has also considered that any cost implications of achieving net zero would not have a material impact on the 
assessment period.
A reasonably possible adverse movement to any of the above key assumptions made would not give rise to impairment.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
16 Property, plant and equipment 
Leasehold 
improvements 
Office 
fixtures and 
fittings
Vehicles and 
computer 
equipment 
Assets under 
construction 
Total
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
Cost
At 1 April 2022
8,341
1,182
23,264
-
32,787
Additions 
700
1,787
2,838
180
5,505
Additions on acquisition (Note 32)
3,330
6,725
1,665
-
11,720
Disposals
-
-
(909)
-
(909)
Exchange differences
-
4
4
-
8
At 31 March 2023
12,371
9,698
26,862
180
49,111
Additions
4,952
95
4,271
-
9,318
Disposals
(1,201)
(447)
(8,367)
-
(10,015)
Transfer to intangible assets
-
(261)
-
-
(261)
Transfer from right-of-use assets
-
-
1,618
-
1,618
Reclassification
180
-
-
(180)
-
Exchange differences
(8)
-
-
-
(8)
At 31 March 2024
16,294
9,085
24,384
-
49,763
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 April 2022
5,449
622
21,344
-
27,415
Charged in year
1,107
1,450
2,079
-
4,636
On disposals
-
-
(71)
-
(71)
At 31 March 2023
6,556
2,072
23,352
-
31,980
Charged in year
1,715
2,051
2,323
-
6,089
On disposals
(1,201)
(447)
(8,365)
-
(10,013)
Transfer to intangible assets
-
(64)
-
-
(64)
Transfer from right-of-use assets
-
-
351
-
351
Exchange differences
-
(2)
-
-
(2)
At 31 March 2024
7,070
3,610
17,661
-
28,341
Net book value
At 31 March 2024
9,224
5,475
6,723
-
21,422
At 31 March 2023
5,815
7,626
3,510
180
17,131
Vehicles and computer equipment includes additions of £2.8m (FY23: £2.6m) relating to customer capital expenditure.
Included within property, plant and equipment additions is £3.1m (FY23: £nil) of assets financed under the Group’s Asset 
Financing Facility. The Directors have exercised judgement in determining that there has been no sale of these assets under 
IFRS15 and therefore the assets are financed rather than representing a sale and leaseback arrangement.
Similar arrangements previously accounted for as a sale and leaseback arrangement in the prior periods have been adjusted 
accordingly in the current year. Included within vehicles and computer equipment is a reclassification of £1.6m relating to 
financed assets that were incorrectly included in Note 17 as a right-of-use asset on the prior period Statement of Financial 
Position. A corresponding asset financing liability has also been recognised following a reclassification from a lease liability in the 
current period, as disclosed within Note 24. As the Directors do not consider the effect on the prior period Financial Statements 
to be material, this has been corrected in the current period.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
110
111
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

17 Right of use assets
Most of the Group’s right-of-use assets are associated with our leased property portfolio.
Land and 
buildings 
Vehicles & 
computer 
equipment 
Total
£000
£000
£000
Cost
At 1 April 2022
26,974
11,936
38,910
Additions
36,189
391
36,580
Additions on acquisition (Note 32)
3,911
-
3,911
Disposals
(629)
-
(629)
Exchange differences
(1)
-
(1)
At 31 March 2023
66,444
12,327
78,771
Additions
699
3,541
4,240
Transfer to property, plant and equipment
-
(1,618)
(1,618)
At 31 March 2024
67,143
14,250
81,393
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 April 2022
13,620
8,252
21,872
Charged in year
8,676
1,941
10,617
At 31 March 2023
22,296
10,193
32,489
Charged in year
10,231
1,546
11,777
Transfer to property, plant and equipment
-
(351)
(351)
At 31 March 2024
32,527
11,388
43,915
Net book value
At 31 March 2024
34,616
2,862
37,478
At 31 March 2023
44,148
2,134
46,282
Of the £4.2m right-of-use assets acquired in the year, £nil was funded using leases that would have previously been 
classified as finance leases under IAS17 (FY23: £nil).
Included in the net book value of land and buildings at 31 March 2024 is £8.2m right-of-use assets for dilapidations  
(FY23: £9.8m).
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
18 Deferred tax
Certain deferred tax assets and liabilities have been offset on the face of the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position. 
The following is the analysis of the deferred tax balances (before offset) for financial reporting purposes:
Year ended 
31 March 2024
Year ended 
31 March 2023 
Restated*
£000
£000
Deferred tax liabilities
(6,083)
(7,648)
Deferred tax assets
8,586
8,724
2,503
1,076
*The prior year restatement is a result of the change in accounting policy following the IAS 12 amendment that was applicable for periods commencing 
from 1 January 2023. As a result, the Group have restated the prior year comparative above and in notes 18.1 and 18.2 below for the purpose of the 
disclosure only. There is no impact on the Statement of Financial Position.
18.1 Deferred tax liabilities
Acquisitions
Property, plant and 
equipment 
Total
£’000
£’000
£’000
Cost
At 1 April 2022 (restated*)
3,114
291
3,405
Recognised in Statement of Comprehensive Income
(1,409)
1,896
487
Movements arising from acquisitions
1,625
-
1,625
Adjustments in relation to prior year recognised in 
Statement of Comprehensive Income
-
282
282
Transfer from deferred tax assets 1
-
1,849
1,849
At 31 March 2023 (restated*)
3,330
4,318
7,648
Recognised in Statement of Comprehensive Income
(1,107)
469
(638)
Adjustments in relation to prior year recognised in 
Statement of Comprehensive Income
(83)
(844)
(927)
At 31 March 2024
2,140
3,943
6,083
1 This is moving a deferred tax liability position from the deferred tax asset table (18.2) to the deferred tax liability table.
Deferred tax liabilities include intangible assets from business acquisitions.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
112
113
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

18 Deferred tax (continued)
18.2 Deferred tax assets
India 
Share-
based 
payments
Tax 
losses 
Property, 
plant and 
equipment 
Other 
timing 
differences 
Total
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
Cost
At 1 April 2022 (restated*)
47
521
1,978
3,561
1,297
7,404
Deferred tax acquired (Note 32)
-
-
-
(4,678)
154
(4,524)
Recognised in Statement of Comprehensive 
Income
-
120
2,114
(752)
2,115
3,597
Recognised in other comprehensive income
-
47
-
-
-
47
Adjustment in relation to prior year
-
-
78
20
253
351
Transfer to deferred tax liabilities 1
-
-
-
1,849
-
1,849
At 31 March 2023 (restated*)
47
688
4,170
-
3,819
8,724
Recognised in Statement of Comprehensive 
Income
3
134
544
-
(467)
214
Recognised in equity
-
78
-
-
-
78
Adjustments in relation to prior year 
recognised in Statement of Comprehensive 
Income
-
(15)
156
-
(542)
(401)
Adjustment in relation to prior year 
recognised in equity
-
(29)
-
-
-
(29)
At 31 March 2024
50
856
4,870
-
2,810
8,586
1This is moving a deferred tax liability position from the deferred tax asset table to the deferred tax liability table (18.1).
Deferred tax assets have been recognised based on the ability of future offset against deferred tax liabilities or against 
future taxable profits. The assessment of future taxable profits is based on forecasts and assumptions consistent with those 
used for our going concern basis of preparation, as set out in Note 1.1. The Group is expected to return to profitability 
following the integration of the acquired businesses as the growth strategies and cost mitigations, as described in Note 1.1 
are delivered.
19 Inventories
Year ended 
31 March 2024
Year ended 
31 March 2023
£000
£000
Goods for resale
4,187
3,716
Goods for resale includes components required to deliver Managed Services to customers. The cost of inventories charged 
to cost of sales in the year totalled £4.7m (FY23: £6.0m). 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
20 Trade and other receivables
Year ended 
31 March 2024
Year ended 
31 March 2023
£000
£000
Trade receivables 
19,390
21,456
Less: provision for impairment of trade receivables and credit notes
(1,200)
(1,251)
Trade receivables – net 
18,190
20,205
Other receivables 
1,084
2,363
Prepayments 
8,245
9,180
Contract acquisition asset
4,137
2,938
Accrued income 
5,194
4,568
36,850
39,254
Current
33,543
39,254
Non-current
3,307
-
36,850
39,254
During the year, the contract acquisition asset was amortised by £1.7m (FY23: £1.5m).
Trade debtor days were 36 at 31 March 2024 compared to 46 at 31 March 2023. Trade debtor days are calculated as gross 
trade debtors divided by revenue (incl. VAT) multiplied by 365.
Non-current assets of £3.3m are comprised of a prepayment balance totalling £1.6m and a contract acquisition asset 
balance totalling £1.7m. Both are expected to be recovered over a period of greater than one year from the balance  
sheet date.
21 Credit quality of financial assets
The amounts of the maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date are as follows: 
Year ended 
31 March 2024
Year ended 
31 March 2023
£000
£000
Trade receivables 
18,190
20,205
Other receivables 
1,084
2,363
Cash and cash equivalents 
3,130
1,366
22,404
23,934
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
114
115
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

21 Credit quality of financial assets (continued)
21.1 Credit quality of trade receivables
The credit quality of trade receivables is reviewed at each reporting date using a provision matrix to measure expected 
credit loss (ECL). The provision is calculated by management on a specific basis based on their best estimate of 
recoverability considering the age and specific circumstances relating to the debtor. The maximum exposure to credit  
risk at the reporting date is the fair value of each class of receivable noted below. The Group does not hold any collateral  
as security. 
The following table provides information about the exposure to credit risk and ECL’s for trade receivables from individual 
customers as at 31 March 2024. For the purpose of calculating the provision, any credit balances within the aging categories 
have been excluded when applying the loss rate.
Year ended 
31 March 
2024 
Weighted 
average 
loss rate
Loss 
Allowance 
Credit 
impaired 
Year ended 
31 March 
2023
£000
£000
£000
Current
14,008
0.5%
(72)
No
18,450
1 to 30 days overdue
2,928 
1.0%
(25)
No
2,212 
31 to 60 days overdue
1,794
2.0%
(30)
No
557
61 to 90 days overdue
383
5.0%
(24)
No
283
91 to 180 days overdue
320 
18.0%
(79)
No
194 
> 180 days overdue
(43)
25.0%
(78)
No
(240)
Gross trade debtors
19,390
(308)
21,456
Provision
(1,200)
(1,251)
Net trade debtors
18,190
20,205
At 31 March 2024 a total ECL provision of £1.2m (FY23: £1.3m) was recognised. This provision consisted of £0.3m (FY23: 
£0.1m) in relation to trade receivables, £0.4m (FY23: £0.3m) provided for within the credit note provisions and £0.6m (FY23: 
£0.8m) regarding inaccurate billing. No provision has been made against accrued income in the year ended 31 March 2024 
(FY23: £nil) as it is considered immaterial.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
21 Credit quality of financial assets (continued)
21.1 Credit quality of trade receivables (continued)
Movements on the Group bad debt and credit note provisions were as follows:
Provision in 
relation to 
FY19 
and earlier 
Provision 
in relation 
to FY20
Provision 
in relation 
to FY21 
Provision 
in relation 
to FY22 
Provision in 
relation to 
FY23
Provision in 
relation to 
FY24
Total 
Provision
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
At 1 April 2022
28
34
290
532
-
-
884
Creation of provision
-
-
-
1
2,122
-
2,123
Utilisation of provision
(28)
(34)
(290)
(528)
(876)
-
(1,756)
At 31 March 2023
-
-
-
5
1,246
-
1,251
Creation of provision
-
-
-
-
1
2,236
2,237
Utilisation of provision
-
-
-
(5)
(987)
(1,296)
(2,288)
At 31 March 2024
-
-
-
-
260
940
1,200
21.2 Credit quality of cash and cash equivalents
The Group’s cash is held at accounts with Barclays Bank PLC which have a Standard and Poor’s rating of A. 
22 Trade and other payables
Year ended 
31 March 2024
Year ended 
31 March 2023
£000
£000
Trade payables
16,287
16,520
Other payables
612
1,892
Taxation and social security
3,085
5,076
Accruals
12,187
11,759
Deferred income
9,983
8,331
42,154
43,578
Trade payable days were 36 at 31 March 2024 compared to 42 as at 31 March 2023. Trade payable days are calculated as 
trade payables divided by total purchases (cost of sales and operating expenditure) multiplied by 365.
Of the deferred income balance of £8.3m at 31 March 2023, £6.9m has been recognised as revenue in the year ended 
31 March 2024.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
117
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements
116

23 Contingent consideration
Year ended 
31 March 2024
Year ended 
31 March 2023
£000
£000
Contingent consideration due on acquisitions within one year:
- 7 Elements Limited
-
450
- Sungard DCs
-
2,540
-
2,990
Contingent consideration is based on the Directors’ best estimate of future payments due at 31 March 2024. Contingent 
consideration is level 3 within the fair value hierarchy.
During FY24, the contingent consideration for the 7 Elements and Sungard acquisitions were finalised, and the final 
settlements totalled £0.5m and £0.4m respectively. Consequently, a £2.1m credit has been recognised as a gain on 
settlement of contingent consideration in exceptional items (see Note 9 for further details) within the Statement of 
Comprehensive Income.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
I have seen many data centres and 
Redcentric showed an attention to detail 
which we could see in the infrastructure. 
When our engineers have been on-site, the 
Redcentric staff have always been very helpful. 
This level of support has made a significant 
difference to our business operations.
“
”
24 Borrowings
Year ended 
31 March 2024
Year ended 
31 March 2023
£000
£000
Current
Lease liabilities
8,903
10,804
Term loans
21
475
Asset financing liabilities
1,128
-
10,052
11,279
Non-current
Lease liabilities
23,077
29,400
Term loans
-
20
Asset financing liabilities
2,481
-
Bank loans
39,885
33,631
65,443
63,051
At 31 March 2024, the Group was party to £87.0m of bank facilities with an original maturity date of 25 April 2025. In March 
2024 these debt facilities were extended at the Group’s request, with a new maturity date of 26 April 2026. As part of this 
extension of the Revolving Credit Facility and Asset Financing Facility term, there were no material changes to the financial 
debt covenants or to other terms and conditions of the agreements. The facilities comprise a Revolving Credit Facility 
(“RCF”) of £80.0m (net £40.0m utilised at 31 March 2024) and a £7.0m Asset Financing Facility (“AFF”) (£3.6m utilised at 
31 March 2024). The AFF is provided by Lombard North Central plc who are party to the overall banking facilities. Certain 
intangible assets (see Note 15) and property plant and equipment (Note 16) are financed under this arrangement. Term 
loans constitute financing arrangements for services and include a supplier loan of £21k for an unsecured three-year 
maintenance contract. Whilst not linked to the bank facilities, it contributes toward permitted indebtedness within this 
agreement, which cannot exceed £2.5m at any given time.
The RCF is provided by a four-bank group of NatWest, Barclays, Bank of Ireland and Silicon Valley Bank (now part of HSBC 
UK Group), with Lombard Technology Services Ltd providing the Asset Financing Facility. The borrowing cost of the facility 
is determined by the level of the Group’s leverage and has a borrowing cost of 235 basis points over SONIA at the Group’s 
current leverage levels. The Group is required to comply with financial covenants for adjusted leverage (net debt to adjusted 
EBITDA), cashflow cover (adjusted cashflow to debt service, where adjusted cashflow is defined as adjusted EBITDA less 
tax paid, dividend payments, IFRS16 lease repayments and cash capital expenditure) and provisions relating to guarantor 
coverage such that guarantors must exceed a prescribed threshold of the Group’s gross assets, revenue and Adjusted 
EBITDA. Covenants are tested quarterly each year. No security has been provided.
The RCF is drawn in short to medium-term tranches of debt that are repayable within 12 months of draw-down. These 
tranches of debt can be rolled over provided certain conditions are met, including compliance with all loan terms. The Group 
considers that it is unlikely it would not be in compliance and therefore, be unable to exercise its right to roll over the debt. 
The Board therefore believe the Group has the ability and the intent to roll over the drawn RCF amounts when due and 
consequently has presented the RCF as a non-current liability. In addition to the financial covenants, the facility requires the 
Group to file audited financial accounts within 120 days of the year end date alongside an audited compliance certificate.
On the 14 August 2024 a modification to the bank facilities was agreed to increase the Asset Financing Facility to £10.0m to 
ensure adequate credit availability for future investment relating to new customer contracts. All other elements of the facility 
remained the same.
Lease liabilities are comprised of secured and unsecured agreements. Secured lease liabilities of £0.8m and secured term 
loans are secured against assets included within right-of-use assets with a carrying value of £0.8m (FY23: £1.8m).
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
118
119
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

24 Borrowings (continued)
24.1 Reconciliation of net debt
Year ended 
31 March 2024
Year ended 
31 March 2023
£000
£000
Revolving Credit Facility
Drawdown on facility
16,500
55,500
Repayment of facility
(10,500)
(21,500)
Finance costs in relation to RCF (non-cash)
3,333
1,804
Interest paid 
(3,288)
(1,751)
Loan arrangement fees paid 
-
(713)
Release of deferred arrangement fees (non-cash) 
209
291
Movement in Revolving Credit Facility
6,254
33,631
Opening balance
33,631
-
Closing balance
39,885
33,631
Lease liabilities
New leases entered into (non-cash) 
4,238
28,314
Transferred to asset financing liabilities (non-cash) 
(1,825)
-
Leases acquired 
-
1,976
IFRS16 leases modifications 
-
(629)
Principal element of lease payments
(10,638)
(6,901)
Interest element of lease payments (non-cash)
1,328
1,218
Interest paid 
(1,328)
(1,218)
Movement in lease liabilities
(8,225)
22,760
Opening balance
40,205
17,445
Closing balance
31,980
40,205
Term loans
Repayment of loans
(474)
(508)
Finance costs in relation to term loans (non-cash)
4
23
Interest paid 
(4)
(24)
Movement in term loans
(474)
(509)
Opening balance
495
1,004
Closing balance
21
495
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
24 Borrowings (continued)
24.1 Reconciliation of net debt (continued)
Year ended 
31 March 2024
Year ended 
31 March 2023
£000
£000
Asset financing liabilities
Transferred from lease liabilities (non-cash) 
1,825
-
Drawdown on facility
2,419
-
Repayment of loans
(635)
-
Finance costs (non-cash)
267
-
Interest paid 
(267)
-
Movement in asset financing liabilities
3,609
-
Opening balance
-
-
Closing balance
3,609
-
Cash
3,130
1,366
Net debt
72,365
72,965
All lines included above are cash unless otherwise stated.
24.2 Terms and repayment schedule
Currency
Nominal 
interest rate
Year of 
maturity
RCF
GBP
SONIA + 2.35%
2026
Term Loans
GBP
1.85%
2025
Leases
GBP
4.0% - 7.2%
2024-2040
AFF
GBP
6.5% - 7.64%
2024-2029
24.3 Lease liabilities
Present 
value as at 
31 March 
2024
Finance 
charges
Future lease 
payments as 
at 31 March 
2024 
Present 
value as at 
31 March 
2023 
Finance 
charges
Future lease 
payments as 
at 31 March 
2023
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
Not later than 1 year
8,903
1,133
10,036
10,804
1,420
12,224
After 1 year but not more than 5 years
17,560
2,292
19,852
20,565
2,973
23,538
After more than 5 years
5,517
240
5,757
8,833
553
9,386
31,980
3,665
35,645
40,202
4,946
45,148
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
120
121
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

25 Liquidity risk
The table below analyses the Group’s financial liabilities into relevant maturity groupings based on the remaining period at the 
balance sheet date to the contractual maturity date. These amounts disclosed in the table are the contracted undiscounted 
cash flows. Balances within 12 months equal their carrying balances as the impact of discounting is not significant.
Less than 1 year 
1 - 5 years 
More than 5 years
Total
£000
£000
£000
£000
At 31 March 2024
Bank loans
3,392
43,625
-
47,017
Leases
10,036
19,852
5,757
35,645
Asset financing liabilities
1,199
2,581
-
3,780
Term loans
21
-
-
21
Trade payables
16,287
-
-
16,287
Other payables
612
-
-
612
31,547
66,058
5,757
103,362
At 31 March 2023
Bank loans
2,755
35,700
-
38,455
Leases
12,224
23,538
9,386
45,148
Term loans
475
20
-
495
Trade payables
16,520
-
-
16,520
Other payables
1,892
-
-
1,892
33,866
59,258
9,386
102,510
The interest accrual for the future forecasted borrowings in each category is dependent on the expected level of funding 
required each month, with an applied interest rate of SONIA (forecast to be 5.5%) above the margin (which is a fixed 
percentage depending on the Group’s adjusted leverage in line with the facility agreement). 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
26 Provisions
Dilapidations provision 
£000
At 1 April 2022
3,883
Additional provisions created during the period
8,426
Provisions acquired from business combination
692
At 31 March 2023
13,001
Additional provisions created during the period
351
Utilised during the period
(978)
At 31 March 2024
12,374
FY24 Analysed as:
Current 
892
Non-current
11,482
12,374
FY23 Analysed as:
Current
1,841
Non-current
11,160
13,001
The dilapidations provision represents the estimated costs associated with returning certain leasehold properties to 
the original condition upon exiting the lease. Given there is estimation in determining the quantum of provisions to be 
recognised a third-party expert was engaged to determine appropriate estimates. This is not considered to be a critical 
estimate as it is not expected to be subject to material reversal in future periods given the specialist input used to inform  
the estimate, and the nature of the estimate. 
Dilapidation provisions have maturity dates from 2024 to 2040 and are therefore discounted to present value using a 
risk-free interest rate (UK Government Bond rates) at the year end, depending on the length of the related lease. The 
discount rates used to calculate the initial provision ranges from 1.85% to 2.63%. After initial measurement, any subsequent 
adjustments to the dilapidations provision will be recorded against the original amount included in right-of-use assets with 
a corresponding adjustment to future depreciation charges. The utilisation of the dilapidations provision will be in line with 
the end of the leasehold properties lease terms to which the provisions relate. The increase of £0.4m through additional 
provisions created has resulted from the net financing movement in the year.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
122
123
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

27 Share capital
Ordinary shares of 0.1p each
Share premium
Number
£000
£000
At 1 April 2022 and 31 March 2023
156,991,982
157
73,267
New shares issued
1,892,937
2
2,382
At 31 March 2024
158,884,919
159
75,649
On 19 January 2024, 1,892,937 new ordinary shares were issued in part satisfaction of the final dividend for the year ended 
31 March 2023 of 2.4 pence per share for certain shareholders representing 63.4% of the Company’s total voting rights. The 
shares were issued at 125.8961 pence per ordinary share being the five-day volume weighted average price of an ordinary 
share at the close of business on 18 January 2024 (the last business day prior to the dividend payment date). The dividend 
shares represented in aggregate 1.19% of the enlarged issued share capital of the Company.
The total shares held in treasury at 31 March 2024 was 632,703 at an average cost of £1.23 per share therefore, at a value of 
£779,224 (FY23: 728,722 shares at an average cost of £1.23, for a total value of £897,479).
The number of shares authorised is the same as the number of shares issued. Ordinary shareholders have the right to attend, 
vote and speak at meetings, receive dividends, and receive a return on assets in the case of a winding up. 
The common control reserve represents the difference between the net assets acquired and the fair value of consideration 
transferred on the acquisition of Redcentric Holdings Limited via demerger from Redstone plc in 2013.
28 Share-based payments
At 31 March 2024, the Group had the following share-based payment arrangements in place:
Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)
The Group operates a Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) under which the Executive Directors and key management personnel 
are awarded nil cost options that will vest subject to the achievement of performance conditions relating to the growth in 
earnings per share.
Performance related bonus
On 4 March 2024 the Executive Directors were awarded a cash-settled share-share based bonus scheme which will pay 
out in the event of a change of control of the Company within 12 months, subject to the discretion of the Remuneration 
Committee. A Stochastic model has been used to measure the fair value of this cash-settled share-based payment 
transaction. No expense has been recognised at the year end as the fair value of the scheme (£6k impact for FY24) is not 
considered material.
Save-As-You-Earn (SAYE)
The Group operates a HMRC approved SAYE option plan under which it offers its UK based colleagues the opportunity to 
participate in a share purchase plan. To participate in the plan, the colleagues are required to save an amount of their gross 
monthly salary, up to a maximum of £500 per month, for a period of 36 months. Under the terms of the plan, at the end of 
the three-year period the colleagues are entitled to purchase shares using funds saved at a price 20% below the market 
price at grant date. Only colleagues who remain in service and save the required amount of their gross monthly salary for 
36 consecutive months will become entitled to purchase the shares. Colleagues who cease their employment, do not save 
the required amount of their gross monthly salary in any month before the 36-month period expires, or elect not to exercise 
their options to purchase shares will be refunded their saved amounts.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
28 Share-based payments (continued)
The Group recognised the following expense for its share-based payments:
Year ended 
31 March 2024
Year ended 
31 March 2023
£000
£000
Equity-settled share-based charge on LTIP scheme
935
861
Equity-settled share-based charge on SAYE plan
118
182
1,053
1,046
National Insurance arising on share options
85
213
1,138
1,256
The fair value of the equity-settled share options granted is estimated as at the date of grant using a binomial model, taking 
into account the terms and conditions upon which the options were granted. The following table illustrates the number and 
weighted average exercise prices (WAEP) of, and movements in, share options during the year.
LTIP 
(number)
SAYE 
(number)
Total 
(number)
WAEP 
(pence)
Balance at 31 March 2022
3,681,300
1,394,731
5,076,031
26.1p
Issued in the period
2,116,726
562,199
2,678,925
20.2p
Forfeited in the period
(159,379)
-
(159,379)
0.1p
Cancelled in the period
(264,670)
(338,974)
(603,644)
59.1p
Exercised in the year
(1,080,567)
(360,914)
(1,441,481)
15.9p
Lapsed in the year
-
(48,832)
(48,832)
102.7p
Balance at 31 March 2023
4,293,410
1,208,210
5,501,620
22.3p
Issued in the period
2,040,861
352,068
2,392,929
15.0p
Forfeited in the period
(459,384)
-
(459,384)
0.1p
Cancelled in the period
(737,708)
(189,084)
(926,792)
20.4p
Exercised in the year
-
(96,019)
(96,019)
119.6p
Balance at 31 March 2024
5,137,179
1,275,175
6,412,354
19.9p
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
124
125
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

28 Share-based payments (continued)
The weighted average remaining contractual life for the share options outstanding at 31 March 2024 is 7 years and 5 months 
(31 March 2023: 7 years and 6 months). The range of exercise prices for options outstanding at the end of the year was 0.1p 
to 119.6p. Share options outstanding at the end of the year with approximate remaining average life are as follows:
Exercise price (pence)
Number, 
year ended 
31 March 2024
Life at 
31 March 2024
Number, 
year ended 
31 March 2023
Life at 
31 March 2023
0.10
5,137,179
8 years 10 months
4,293,410
8 years 11 months
119.60
34,013
-
143,577
1 year 0 months
108.33
91,412
-
93,238
2 year 0 months
99.87
434,155
1 year 4 months
496,873
2 years 4 months
96.07
375,973
1 year 11 months
474,522
2 years 11 months
101.33
339,622
3 years 0 months
-
-
6,412,354
7 years 5 months
5,501,620
7 years 6 months
The following table illustrates the status of the options outstanding at the end of the year:
31 March 2024 
Number of 
options
31 March 2024 
WAEP
31 March 2023 
Number of 
options
31 March 2023 
WAEP
Performance conditions satisfied
25,000
0.1p
25,000
0.1p
Subject to performance conditions
5,112,179
0.1p
4,268,410
0.1p
Save-As-You-Earn
1,275,175
1.0p
1,208,210
101.4p
Outstanding at the end of the year
6,412,354
19.9p
5,501,620
22.3p
29 Capital commitments
At 31 March 2024, the Group entered into contracts to purchase property plant and equipment totalling £147k (FY23: £nil).
30 Pensions
The Group operates a defined contribution pension scheme for eligible employees. The charge for the year ended 31 March 
2024 was £1.4m (FY23: £1.2m). At the year end, there was a pension creditor of £0.3m (FY23: £0.3m).
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
31 Subsidiaries
The undertakings whose results and financial position are consolidated within the Group Financial Statements at  
31 March 2024 are as follows:
Principal activity 
Country of 
incorporation 
% of ordinary 
share capital 
owned
Held directly by Redcentric plc 
Redcentric Solutions Limited
Managed Services
England and Wales
100%
Held indirectly 
Redcentric Solutions Private Limited
Support Services
India
100%
Redcentric Support Services Private Limited
Support Services
India
100%
Piksel Industry Solutions Limited
Dormant
England and Wales
100%
7 Elements Limited
Dormant
Scotland
100%
Hotchilli Internet Limited
Dormant
England and Wales
100%
4D Data Centres Limited
Dormant
England and Wales
100%
All companies have a registered office of Central House, Beckwith Knowle, Harrogate HG3 1UG, except Redcentric Solutions 
Private Limited and Redcentric Support Services Private Limited which have a registered office of 8th Floor, My Home 
Twitza, Plot No. 30/A Sy No. 83/1, TSIIC Knowledge City, Raidurg, Hyderabad Rangareddy Telangana 500081 INDIA, and 
7 Elements Limited which has a registered office of 4-5 Lochside Way, Edinburgh Park, Edinburgh, Scotland, EH12 9DT.
On 31 January 2024, the trade, assets and liabilities of 7 Elements Limited were hived into the Group’s trading subsidiary 
Redcentric Solutions Limited. The company was therefore dormant at the year end.
32 Business combinations in prior period
4D Data Centres
On 27 June 2022, the Group’s trading subsidiary Redcentric Solutions Limited acquired 100% of the share capital of 4D 
Data Centres Limited (“4D”) for £10.1m consideration paid in cash. The business provides colocation, cloud and connectivity 
services to mid-market customers. The primary purpose of the business combination was to scale the Group’s existing 
revenues in this area with significant synergies expected as the acquisition was integrated into the Group. Management 
considered signing of the share purchase agreement (SPA) on the 27 June 2022 as the change of control and therefore, 
acquisition date for the transaction. 
The following table summarises the acquisition date fair value of each major class of consideration transferred:
£000s
Cash
9,842
Deferred consideration 1
162
True up payment (deferred) 2
119
10,123
1 The deferred consideration was a delayed R&D claim refund due from HMRC which was to be paid to the Shareholders on receipt. 
2 The true up payment was the additional amount due following the update to fair values at the time of completion, when the original cash transfer was based 
on estimates. 
The Group incurred acquisition related costs of £0.2m on legal fees, due diligence costs and direct integration costs in 
FY23. These costs have been included in exceptional items within the prior year column in Note 9.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
126
127
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

32 Business combinations in prior period (continued)
The following table summarises the recognised amounts of assets and liabilities assumed as at the date of acquisition:
Fair value 
£000s
Property, plant and equipment
2,089
Customer relationships
6,300
Brand
200
Right-of-use assets
1,287
Trade and other receivables
920
Cash and cash equivalents
1,053
Deferred tax
(1,787)
Trade and other payables
(1,647)
Deferred income
(764)
IFRS 16 leases
(1,976)
Provisions
(692)
Corporation tax receivable 
186
Total identifiable net assets acquired
5,169
Goodwill
4,954
Total consideration
10,123
The goodwill arising on acquisition represented the future income from new customers, the potential to cross-sell existing 
Group products to the existing 4D customer base, as well as the assembled workforce which was expected to increase the 
Group’s competence in key growth areas of the Security Services sector.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
32 Business combinations in prior period (continued)
The fair value of the acquired customer relationships was £6.3m. To estimate the fair value of the customer relationships 
intangible asset, a multi-period excess earnings “MEEM” approach was adopted. This approach considered the present 
value of cash flows expected to be generated by the customer relationships, excluding any cash flows related to 
contributory assets.
On 28 February 2023, the trade, assets and liabilities of 4D were hived into the Group’s trading subsidiary Redcentric 
Solutions Limited. For the 8 months ended 28 February 2023, 4D contributed revenue of £5.3m and profits, before 
allocation of group overheads, share based payments and tax, of £1.1m to the Group’s results in FY23. 
Sungard 
Consulting
On 7 June 2022, the Group’s trading subsidiary Redcentric Solutions Limited acquired the consulting business from Sungard 
Availability Services (UK) Limited (in administration) for £4.2m consideration paid in cash. The business provides services in 
respect of business continuity, cloud and infrastructure, cyber resilience, disaster recovery and hybrid cloud transformation 
services alongside the provision and operation of cloud related services. Management considered signing of the Agreement 
for the sale of assets as the change of control and therefore, acquisition date for the transaction. No assets were acquired or 
liabilities assumed from the Consulting business transaction. 
Data Centres
On 6 July 2022, the Group’s trading subsidiary Redcentric Solutions Limited acquired certain business and assets relating 
to three data centres “DCs” from Sungard Availability Services (UK) Limited (in administration) for initial consideration of 
£10.1m paid in cash and a cash prepayment of £3.4m for a payment made to the administrators in advance for a license to 
occupy on the three DCs, and contingent consideration with a maximum potential value of £19.0m depending on customer 
retention and certain performance criteria. 
The DCs and Consulting acquisitions were treated as a single transaction. The resulting change due to this treatment as a 
single transaction was that the goodwill from the acquisitions was considered in aggregate rather than separately. 
The following table summarises the acquisition date fair value of each major class of consideration transferred for the 
combined transaction:
£000s
Cash
14,320
Prepayment (paid in cash)
3,369
Contingent consideration3
2,540
20,229
3 The contingent consideration was an additional amount based on an agreed sliding scale threshold of customers committing to long-term contracts 
with the business post-acquisition, determined by the recurring monthly revenue value by customer and by each of the three data centres. This amount 
was the Board’s best estimate as at the acquisition date of the amount due as contingent consideration, discounted to present value. 
The Group incurred acquisition related costs of £0.3m on legal fees, due diligence costs and direct integration costs in 
FY23. These costs have been included in exceptional items within the prior year column in Note 9.
During FY24, the contingent consideration was finalised, and the final settlement totalling £0.4m was paid. Consequently,  
a £2.1m credit has been recognised as a fair value adjustment to contingent consideration in exceptional items (Note 9).
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
128
129
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

32 Business combinations in prior period (continued)
The following table summarises the recognised amounts of assets and liabilities assumed as at the date of acquisition:
Fair value 
£000s
Property, plant and equipment
9,630
Customer relationships
8,800
Right-of-use assets
2,624
Prepayments 
745
Deferred tax
(4,362)
Accruals
(185)
Other creditors
(293)
Total identifiable net assets acquired
16,959
Goodwill
3,270
Total consideration
20,229
The goodwill arising on acquisition represented the future income from new customers and the potential to cross-sell existing 
Group products to the existing Sungard customer base, which was expected to increase the Group’s competence in key 
growth areas of the Security Services sector.
The fair value of the acquired customer relationships was £8.8m. To estimate fair value of the customer relationships intangible 
asset, a multi-period excess earnings “MEEM” approach was adopted, and this approach considered the present value of cash 
flows expected to be generated by the customer relationships, excluding any cash flows related to contributory assets.
The DCs earned revenue of £36.3m and profits, before allocation of group overheads, share based payments and tax, of £2.5m 
in the period since acquisition in FY23.
The consulting business earned revenue of £0.6m and profits, before allocation of group overheads, share-based payments 
and tax, of £0.2m in the period since acquisition in FY23. 
The net cash flow for the acquisitions were as follows:
£000s
Cash paid for 4D
10,123
Cash paid for Sungard, including prepayment 
17,689
Less: cash acquired
(1,053)
Less: Piksel deferred consideration
(153)
26,606
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued) 
33 Related parties 
Directors’ emoluments are disclosed in the Annual Remuneration Report on page 65 and compensation of key management 
personnel is disclosed in Note 11.
Oliver Scott (non-independent Non-Executive Director) is a beneficial owner of Kestrel Opportunities, who held 16,715,305 
ordinary shares in the Company as at 31 March 2024. 
Nick Bate (independent Non-Executive Chairman) is a Director of and investor in Europa Communications Limited.  
During FY24 Redcentric Solutions Limited incurred costs of £21,360 (FY23: £nil) in respect of trading with Europa 
Communications Limited, and at the year end there was an outstanding balance due to this supplier of £5,385 (FY23: £nil). 
The balance at the year end is included in accruals, within trade and other payables.
There were no other transactions with related parties in the year to 31 March 2024. In the previous year to 31 March 2023, the 
only related party transactions were in respect of Directors’ emoluments and compensation of key management personnel.
34 Subsequent events 
On the 14 August 2024 a modification to the bank facilities was agreed to increase the Asset Financing Facility to £10.0m to 
ensure adequate credit availability for future investment relating to new customer contracts. All other elements of the facility 
remained the same.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
What we were looking for was like for like – 
we wanted to switch over to a predictable 
plug and play service. But what Redcentric 
provided was much more for less.
“
”
130
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements
131

Redcentric is a name we 
can trust and a name that 
our NHS customers will 
trust. You bring in a great 
service, and a great team 
behind that as well.
“
”
Redcentric plc  
Company Balance Sheet as at 31 March 2024 
31 March 
2024
31 March 
2023
Note
£000
£000
Fixed assets
Investments
2
106,149
105,096
Debtors
3
562
406
106,711
105,502
Current liabilities
Creditors – amounts falling due within one year
4
(19,359)
(21,607)
Net current liabilities
(19,359)
(21,607)
Net assets
87,352
83,895
Capital and reserves
Called up share capital
5
159
157
Share premium account
5
75,649
73,267
Share option reserve
9,940
8,887
Own shares held in treasury
(779)
(898)
Retained earnings:
At the beginning of the year
2,482
9,621
Profit for the year
3,656
-
Other changes in retained earnings
(3,755)
(7,139)
2,383
2,482
Total shareholders’ funds
87,352
83,895
The Notes on pages 135 to 141 are an integral part of these Financial Statements. 
The Financial Statements of Redcentric Plc (Registration Number 08397584) on pages 133 to 134, and the Notes to these 
Financial Statements on pages 135 to 141 were approved by the Board on 15 August 2024 and are signed on its behalf by:
David Senior 
Chief Financial Officer
132
133
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
132

Company Statement of Changes in Equity  
for the year ended 31 March 2024
Called 
up Share 
Capital
Share 
Premium
Share 
option 
reserve
Own shares 
held in 
treasury 
Retained 
Earnings
Total 
shareholders’ 
funds
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
Balance at 1 April 2022
157
73,267
7,843
(2,673)
9,621
88,215
Transactions with owners
Dividend paid to shareholders
-
-
-
-
(5,593)
(5,593)
Share option exercises
-
-
-
1,775
(1,546)
229
Share-based payments
-
-
1,044
-
-
1,044
At 31 March 2023
157
73,267
8,887
(898)
2,482
83,895
Profit for the period
-
-
-
-
3,656
3,656
Transactions with owners
Dividend paid to shareholders 
(Note 5)
-
-
-
-
(3,752)
(3,752)
Issue of new shares (Note 5)
2
2,382
-
-
-
2,384
Share option exercises
-
-
-
119
(3)
116
Share-based payments (Note 2)
-
-
1,053
-
-
1,053
At 31 March 2024
159
75,649
9,940
(779)
2,383
87,352
The Notes on pages 135 to 141 are an integral part of these Financial Statements.
Notes to the company Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024
1 Accounting policies
These separate Financial Statements of the Company are presented as required by the Companies Act 2006. The Company 
meets the definition of a qualifying entity under FRS 100 ‘Application of Financial Reporting Requirements’ issued by the 
Financial Reporting Council (FRC). Accordingly, these Financial Statements were prepared in accordance with Financial 
Reporting Standard 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework (“FRS 101”). In preparing these Financial Statements, the 
Company applies the recognition, measurement and disclosure requirements of UK-adopted international accounting 
standards (“Adopted IFRSs”),but makes amendments where necessary in order to comply with Companies Act 2006 and 
has set out below where advantage of the FRS 101 disclosure exemptions has been taken. These policies have all been 
applied consistently throughout the year unless otherwise stated.
In these Financial Statements, the Company has applied the exemptions available under FRS 101 in respect of the 
following disclosures: 
•	
a Cash Flow Statement and related Notes; 
•	
comparative period reconciliations for share capital, tangible fixed assets, intangible assets and investments; 
•	
disclosures in respect of transactions with wholly owned subsidiaries; 
•	
disclosures in respect of capital management; 
•	
the effects of new but not yet effective IFRS;
•	
disclosures in respect of the compensation of key management personnel; and
•	
disclosures of transactions with a management entity that provides key management personnel services  
to the Company.
As the Consolidated Financial Statements of the ultimate parent undertaking include the equivalent disclosures, the 
Company has also taken the exemptions under FRS 101 available in respect of the following disclosures:
•	
IFRS 2 ‘Share-based Payments’ in respect of group settled share-based payments
•	
Certain disclosures required by IAS 36 ‘Impairment of Assets’ in respect of the impairment of goodwill and indefinite 
life intangible assets; 
•	
Certain disclosures required by IFRS 3 ‘Business Combinations’ in respect of business combinations undertaken by the 
Company in prior periods; and
•	
Certain disclosures required by IFRS 13 ‘Fair Value Measurement’ and the disclosures required by IFRS 7 ‘Financial 
Instrument Disclosures’.
The accounting policies set, unless otherwise stated, have been applied consistently to all periods presented in these 
Financial Statements.
1.1 Investments
Investments in subsidiaries are carried at cost less impairment which is based on the fair value at acquisition. Investments are 
reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying values may not be recoverable. 
If any such indication exists and where the carrying amounts exceed the estimated recoverable amount, the assets or cash 
generating units are written down to their recoverable amount.
134
135
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

Notes to the company Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
1 Accounting policies (continued)
1.2 Taxation
The taxation expense charged in the Statement of Comprehensive Income represents the sum of the current tax expense 
and the deferred tax expense.
The current tax payable is based on the taxable profit for the year. Taxable profit differs from accounting profit as reported 
in the Statement of Comprehensive Income because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible 
in other years and it further excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. The liability for current tax is measured 
using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.
Deferred tax is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amount of assets 
and liabilities in the Financial Statements and the corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit and 
is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax is provided for on all temporary differences at 
the balance sheet date between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts for financial reporting 
purposes, with the following exceptions:
•	
where the temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or an asset or liability in a transaction that 
is not a business combination that at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or loss;
•	
in respect of taxable temporary differences associated with investments in subsidiaries, where the timing of the reversal 
of the temporary differences can be controlled and it is probable that the temporary differences will not reverse in the 
foreseeable future; and
•	
deferred income tax assets are recognised only to the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be available 
against which deductible temporary differences carried forward tax credits or tax losses can be utilised.
The carrying amount of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each reporting date and reduced to the extent that it is no 
longer probable that sufficient taxable profit will be available to allow all or part of the deferred tax asset to be utilised. 
Unrecognised deferred tax assets are re-assessed at each reporting date and are recognised to the extent that it has 
become probable that future taxable profits will allow the deferred tax asset to be recovered. 
In assessing the recoverability of deferred tax assets, the Company relies on the same forecast assumptions used elsewhere 
in the Financial Statements and in other management reports, which, among other things, reflect the potential impact of 
climate-related development on the business. 
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax rates that are expected to apply when the related asset is  
realised or the liability is settled, based on tax rates and tax laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the 
reporting date. 
Deferred tax is charged or credited in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, except where the underlying 
transaction relates directly to equity.
The Company offsets deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities if and only if it has a legally enforceable right to set off 
current tax assets and current tax liabilities and the deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities relate to income taxes 
levied by the same taxation authority and the Company intends to settle current tax liabilities and assets on a net basis.
Notes to the company Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
1 Accounting policies (continued)
1.3 Dividends
Dividends payable to equity shareholders are included in the Financial Statements within ‘other creditors’ when a final 
dividend is approved by shareholders in a general meeting. Interim dividends to equity shareholders approved by the Board 
during the financial year are not included in the Financial Statements until paid.
Dividends receivable from the Company’s investments are recorded in the Company Income Statement once the dividend 
has been declared and approved by the Board.
1.4 Provisions
Provisions are recognised when the Company has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event, it is 
probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation, and a reliable 
estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.
1.5 Treasury shares
Redcentric Plc shares held by the Company are deducted from equity as “treasury shares” and are recognised at cost. 
Consideration received for the sale of such shares is also recognised in equity, with any difference between the proceeds 
from sale and the original cost being taken to share premium. No gain or loss is recognised in the Company Income 
Statement on the purchase, sale, issue or cancellation of equity shares. 
1.6 Share-based payments
Equity-settled transactions
The cost of equity-settled transactions with employees of the Group is measured by reference to the fair value of the award 
at the date at which they are granted and is recognised as an expense over the vesting period, which ends on the date at 
which the relevant employees become fully entitled to the award. Fair value is determined by an external valuer using an 
appropriate pricing model for which the assumptions are approved by the Directors. In valuing equity-settled transactions, 
only vesting conditions linked to the market price of the shares of the Company are considered.
No expense is recognised in the subsidiary company for awards that do not ultimately vest, except for awards where vesting 
is conditional upon a market condition, which are treated as vesting irrespective of whether or not the market condition is 
satisfied, provided that all other performance conditions are satisfied.
At each balance sheet date before vesting, the cumulative expense is calculated, representing the extent to which the 
vesting period has expired and management’s best estimate of the achievement or otherwise of non-market conditions, 
number of equity instruments that will ultimately vest or in the case of an instrument subject to a market condition, be 
treated as vesting described above. The movement in the cumulative expense since the previous balance sheet date is 
recognised in the Company Income Statement, with a corresponding entry in equity.
Where the terms of an equity-settled award are modified or a new award is designated as replacing a cancelled or settled 
award, the existing charge is recognised immediately. In addition, an expense is recognised over the remainder of the new 
vesting period for the incremental fair value of any modification, based on the difference between the fair value of the 
original award and the fair value of the modified award, both as measured on the date of the modification. No reduction is 
recognised if this difference is negative.
Where an equity-settled award is cancelled, it is treated as if it had vested on the date of cancellation, and any expense 
not yet recognised for the award is recognised immediately. Any compensation paid up to the fair value of the award at the 
cancellation or settlement date is deducted from equity, with any excess over fair value being treated as an expense in the 
Company Income Statement.
136
137
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

Notes to the company Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
1 Accounting policies (continued)
1.6 Share-based payments (continued)
In respect of equity-settled transactions with employees, the Company grants rights to its equity instruments to employees 
of the wider Group. The Group’s subsidiaries are the receiving entities for such arrangements as they receive the related 
services from employees, however such awards are ultimately settled by the parent Company. As the Company receives 
services indirectly through its subsidiaries (with such services increasing the value of the subsidiary and hence the 
Company’s investment in the subsidiary), the Company recognises in equity the equity-settled shared-based payment 
amount, with a corresponding increase in the cost of the Company’s investment in the subsidiary. 
1.7 Subsidiaries
For the year ended 31 March 2024 the following companies are exempt from audit under s479A of the Companies Act 2006 
(the Act) as Redcentric plc will provide a guarantee under s479C of the Act and their results are included in its Consolidated 
Financial Statements.
•	
Piksel Industry Solutions Limited (03048367)
•	
7 Elements Limited (SC382475)
•	
4D Data Centres Limited (04592242)
1.8 Intra-group financial guarantee contracts
Where the Company enters into financial guarantee contracts to guarantee the indebtedness of other companies within 
its group, the Company considers these to be in the scope of IFRS 9 and accounts for them as such. Financial guarantee 
contracts issued are initially measured at fair value. Subsequently, they are measured at the higher of the loss allowance 
determined in accordance with IFRS 9 and the amount initially recognised less, when appropriate, the cumulative amount  
of income recognised in accordance with the principles of IFRS 15.
1.9 Key judgements and sources of estimation uncertainty
There were no critical accounting judgements that would have a material effect on the amounts recognised in the 
Company’s Financial Statements or key sources of estimation uncertainty at the balance sheet date that would have a 
significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying value of assets and liabilities within the next financial year. 
Impairment reviews show significant headroom and there are no additional indicators to suggest that the Company’s 
investments should be impaired. 
1.10 Parent company profit and loss account 
As permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, the Parent Company has not presented its own profit and  
loss account. 
Notes to the company Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
2 Investments held as fixed assets
Year ended 
31 March 
2024
Year ended 
31 March 
2023
£000
£000
Investments in subsidiaries
96,062
96,062
Capital contribution related to share-based payments for subsidiaries
10,087
9,034
106,149
105,096
All of the Company’s investments are unlisted. Details of subsidiary undertakings are included in Note 31 of the Group 
Financial Statements.
During the year investments increased by £1,053k in respect of the capital contribution to Redcentric Solutions Limited 
relating to the share-based payment transaction. The Company settled the share-based payment transaction on behalf of 
Redcentric Solutions Limited. There is no recharge arrangement in place for share-based payments settled by the Company 
on half of Redcentric Solutions Limited. For further details see Note 28 to the Group accounts.
The Company's investments have been assessed for potential indicators of impairment. No indicators of impairment have 
been identified. In informing their assessment as to whether an impairment indicator exists, the Directors compare the 
carrying value of the investments to the value in use of the subsidiaries.
The value in use of the subsidiary has been calculated using a Board approved five-year forecast cash flow projections to the 
period of 31 March 2029 comprising the detailed Group budget for FY25 and latest detailed forecast for FY26, with higher 
level assumptions applied for the outer years. A terminal value based on a perpetuity calculation using a 2.0% real growth 
rate was then added (FY23: 2.0% growth).
The key assumptions used in the value in use calculations for the subsidiary cashflows were as follows:
•	
New order intake consistent with that achieved in H2-FY24;
•	
Price increases in line with CPI;
•	
Overall gross margin percentage of c. 70% in line with historic trends;
•	
Electricity costs driven by near-term contracted prices and medium-term 3rd party price forecasts for energy;
•	
Operating costs (depending on nature) to increase in line with either revenue growth or CPI, factoring in any near-term 
licence inflation;
•	
Pre-tax discount rate of 10.87% (FY23: 11.2%) (post tax rate of 10.51% (FY23: 10.84%)) estimated using a weighted 
average cost of capital, adjusted to reflect current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific 
to the Group; and
•	
Terminal growth rate percentage is consistent with the market the entity operates in for real growth.
The value in use has also considered that any cost implications of achieving net zero would not have a material impact on the 
assessment period.
 A reasonably possible adverse movement to any of the above key assumptions made would not give rise to impairment, 
therefore supporting the assessment made that there are no impairment triggers in respect of the carrying amount of the 
Company's investment in subsidiaries.
138
139
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

Notes to the company Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
3 Debtors
Year ended 
31 March 
2024
Year ended 
31 March 
2023
£000
£000
Deferred tax asset on tax losses
562
406
Deferred tax assets have been recognised based on the ability of future offset against deferred tax liabilities or against 
future surrendered losses to profitable trading subsidiaries in turn for consideration. The assessment of future taxable profits 
in trading subsidiaries is based on forecasts and assumptions consistent with those used for our going concern basis of 
preparation, as set out in Note 1.1 of the Group Consolidated Financial Statements.
4 Creditors – amounts falling due within one year
Year ended 
31 March 
2024
Year ended 
31 March 
2023
£000
£000
Amounts owed to subsidiaries
19,359
21,607
Amounts due to Group undertakings are unsecured, interest-free and have no fixed payment terms.
5 Share capital
Ordinary shares of 0.1p each
Share premium
Number
£000
£000
At 1 April 2022 and 31 March 2023
156,991,982
157
73,267
New shares issued
1,892,937
2
2,382
At 31 March 2024
158,884,919
159
75,649
On 19 January 2024, 1,892,937 new ordinary shares were issued in part satisfaction of the final dividend for the year ended 
31 March 2023 of 2.4 pence per share for certain shareholders representing 63.4% of the Company’s total voting rights. The 
shares were issued at 125.8961 pence per ordinary share being the five-day volume weighted average price of an ordinary 
share at the close of business on 18 January 2024 (the last business day prior to the dividend payment date). The dividend 
shares represented in aggregate 1.19% of the enlarged issued share capital of the Company. The FY23 final dividend therefore 
constituted of £2.4m dividend shares plus £1.4m cash.
During FY24, 96,019 treasury shares have been utilised for various share option exercises, leaving 632,703 shares held in 
treasury at 31 March 2024 (31 March 2023: 728,722).
Notes to the company Financial Statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2024 (continued)
6 Auditor’s remuneration
The Company audit fee is £50,000 (FY23: £45,000). This fee was borne by another Group company.
7 Related parties
The Company has taken exemption not to disclose transactions with entities wholly owned by the Group.
Directors' emoluments are disclosed in the Annual Report on Remuneration of the Consolidated Financial Statements on 
page 65.
Oliver Scott (non-independent Non-Executive Director) is a beneficial owner of Kestrel Opportunities, who held 16,715,305 
ordinary shares in the Company as at 31 March 2024. 
There were no other transactions with related parties in the year to 31 March 2024.
8 Guarantees
The Company has committed to be a financial guarantor under the Group’s banking facilities, and is also party to the 
Group’s cross banking guarantees. These arrangements represent financial guarantee contracts which have been accounted 
for in line with IFRS 9, as explained in the Company’s accounting policies. The fair value of these financial guarantee 
contracts has been assessed to be immaterial.
140
141
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
Financial Statements

Directors
Executive
Peter Brotherton – Chief Executive Officer
David Senior – Chief Financial Officer
Non-executive
Nick Bate
Alan Aubrey
Oliver Scott
Michelle Senecal De Fonseca
Company Secretary
David Senior
Company Number
08397584
Registered Office
Central House 
Beckwith Knowle 
Harrogate 
HG3 1UG
Auditor
KPMG LLP 
Quayside House 
110 Quayside 
Newcastle upon Tyne  
Tyne and Wear  
NE1 3DX
Nominated Adviser and Broker
Cavendish Capital Markets Limited 
1 Bartholomew Close 
London 
EC1A 7BL
Registrars
Link Group 
Central Square 
29 Wellington Street 
Leeds 
LS1 4DL
Legal Advisers to the Group
Travers Smith 
10 Snow Hill 
London 
EC1A 2AL
Clarion Solicitors 
Elizabeth House 
13-19 Queen Street 
Leeds 
LS1 2TW
Directors and advisers
Annual Report and Accounts 2024
Financial Statements
142
WYCA now has  
a future-proof solution 
which will allow further 
communication channels 
to be rolled out in line with 
its development plans.
“
”
142

Head office
Central House
Beckwith Knowle
Harrogate 
HG3 1UG
T 0800 983 2522
E sayhello@redcentricplc.com
W www.redcentricplc.com